Agilent 4396B Performance Test Manual

Page 1
Agilent
4396B Network/Spectrum/Impedance
Analyzer
PERFORMANCE TEST
number
F
manual
prex
or
additional
numbers
SERIAL
applies
JP1KE,
important
,
read
\Serial
NUMBERS
directly
or
rmware
Number"
to
instruments
revision
information
in Appendix
about
MANU
with
serial
1.01
and below
serial
A.
AL
.
Agilent Part No. 04396-90130
Printed in Japan March 2000
Third Edition
Page 2
Notice
The
information
document
reserved.
language
contains
No
part
without
contained
proprietary
of
this
the
prior
in
this
document
written
document
information
may
be
consent
is
subject
that
is
photocopied,
of
the
Agilent T
to
change
protected
reproduced,
echnologies.
without
by
copyright.
or
notice
.
All
translated
rights
are
to another
Agilent
T
echnologies
Component
1-3-2,
Hyogo
Murotani,
,
651-2241
T
est
Japan,
PGU-Kobe
Nishi-ku,
Japan
Kobe-shi,
c
1997,2000 Agilent Technologies Japan, Ltd.
Page 3
Manual Printing
History
March
July
March
1997
1997
2000
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
First
Edition (part
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
Second Edition
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
Third Edition
number: 04396-90120)
(part
(part
number:
number:
04396-90130)
04396-90130)
iii
Page 4
Safety Summary
The
following
service
W
ARNINGS
In
addition
,
and
elsewhere
it
general
repair
violates
safety
of this
in
safety standards
instrument.
The
A
gilent
requirements
T
echnologies assumes
.
precautions must
instrument. F
this manual
no liability
be observed
ailure to
may impair
of design,
for the
during all
comply with
the protection
manufacture,
customer's failure
phases of
these precautions
provided by
and intended
the equipment.
use of
to
comply
operation,
or with
the
with
specic
these
Note
4396B
in
Note
LEDs
CLASS
Ground
T
o
avoid
safety
DO
Do
not
electrical
Keep
earth
NOT
operate
A
way
The
Instrument
electric
shock
ground
Operate
the
instrument
From
Operating personnel
adjustments
with
the
with
the
circuits
must
power
power
before
be
cable
cable
touching
comply
IEC1010-1.
in
4396B
1
LED
hazard,
by
the
supplied
In
An
instrument
in
such
Live
must
not
made
by
connected.
removed.
them.
with
INST
4396B
are
are
Class
PRODUCT
the
instrument
power
Explosive
in
the
presence
an
environment
Circuits
remove
qualied
Under
T
o
avoid
ALLA
TION
INDOOR
1
in
accordance
chassis
cable
Atmosphere
of
constitutes
instrument
maintenance
certain
injuries
CA
TEGORY
USE
product.
and
with
earth
ammable
covers
.
personnel.
conditions
,
always
II
with
IEC825-1.
cabinet
blade
.
gasses
a
denite
Component
Do
,
dangerous
disconnect
and
POLLUTION
must
be
or
fumes
safety
replacement
not
replace
voltages
power
connected
.
Operation
hazard.
components
may
and
discharge
DEGREE
to
a
of
and
internal
exist
2
any
even
DO
NOT
Service
Or
A
djust
Alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering rst
aid and resuscitation, is present.
DO NOT Substitute P
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards
arts Or Modify Instrument
, do not install substitute parts or
perform unauthorized modications to the instrument. Return the instrument to a Agilent
T
echnologies Sales and Service Oce for service and repair to ensure that safety features are
maintained.
iv
Page 5
Dangerous
W
arnings
this
,
manual.
Procedure
such
as
the
Instructions
W
example
contained
arnings
below
in
,
precede
the
warnings must
potentially dangerous
be followed.
procedures throughout
W
arning
Dangerous voltages
instrument. Use
extreme caution
this instrument.
, capable
of
causing
when handling,
death,
are
present
testing,
in
and
this
adjusting
v
Page 6
Certication
Agilent
of
T
echnologies
shipment
measurements
T
echnology
facilities
W
arranty
of
Agilent
,
to
other
workmanship
certain
specied
repair
F
or
Agilent
T
echnologies
pay
another
Agilent
T
echnologies
property
of
components
or
warranty
Technologies
all
shipping
country
T
echnologies
the
instrument,
period.
replace
installed
certies
from
the
are
traceable
the extent
International
T
echnologies
for
a
period
listed
During
products
service
.Buyer
shall
pay
charges
.
warrants
for
use
with
on
or
factory.
to
allowed by
instrument
of
one
in
General
the warranty
that
or
repair
shall
shipping
,
duties
an
instrument
that
instrument.
software
that this
Agilent T
the United
product met
echnologies further
States National
the Institution's
Standards Organization
year
product
from the
is
warranted against
date of
Information
period, Agilent
prove to
,
this
prepay
charges
,
and
that
,
or
be defective
product
shipping
to
taxes
its
software
will
Agilent
rmware
must
return
for
products
execute
T
will
and
echnologies
be
its published
certies that
Institute of
calibration facility
members.
shipment, except
of
this manual,
Technologies
.
be returned
charges
the
to
product
Agilent
returned
rmware
its
designated
programming
does
uninterrupted
specications at
its calibration
Standards and
,or
defects in
that
the
warranty
will,
at
to
a
service
T
echnologies
to
Buyer
.
However
to
Agilent
by
instruction
not
warrant
or
error
the time
to the
material and
in
the
shall
its
option,
facility
designated
,
T
echnologies
Agilent
when
that
free.
calibration
case
of
be
for
the
either
by
and
Agilent
Buyer
shall
from
the operation
Limitation
The
foregoing
maintenance
misuse
,
preparation
No
other
implied
by
operation
or
warranty
warranties
Of
W
arranty
warranty
Buyer
shall
,
Buyer-supplied
outside
maintenance
is
expressed
of
merchantability
not
apply
the
environmental
.
or
to
software
implied.
and
defects
resulting
or
interfacing,
specications
A
gilent
tness
from
unauthorized
for
the
T
echnologies
for a
particular purpose
improper
product,
specically
or
inadequate
modication
or
improper
disclaims
.
or
site
the
vi
Page 7
Exclusive Remedies
The
remedies
shall
not
whether
be
liable
based
provided
for any
on
contract,
herein
direct, indirect,
Assistance
are buyer's
tort, or
sole and
special, incidental,
any other
exclusive remedies
legal theory
or consequential
.
.A
gilent T
echnologies
damages,
Product
Agilent
F
or
any
A
ddresses
maintenance
T
echnologies
assistance
are
,
provided
agreements
products
contact
at
and
.
your
nearest Agilent
the
back
other
of this
customer
Technologies
manual.
assistance
Sales and
agreements
Service
are
available for
Oce
.
vii
Page 8
Safety Symbols
General
denitions
Instruction
necessary
Alternating
Direct
On
O
In
Out position
Frame
equipment which
High
voltages
condition
result
condition
result
of
safety
current.
(Supply).
(Supply).
position
(or
voltage
which
W
arning
in
injury
Caution
in
damage
symbols used
manual
for
the
user
current.
of
push-button
of
push-button
chassis)
normally
terminals :
may exceed
sign
or
the
like
or
death
sign
or
the
like
to
on equipment
symbol:
the
to refer
switch.
switch.
terminal. A
include
terminals fed
1000 volts
denotes
,
which,
denotes
,
which,
or
a
to
personnel.
a
destruction
product is
to the
connection
all
hazard.
if
not
correctly
hazard.
if
not
correctly
of
or in
manuals are
marked with
instruction manual.
to
the
frame
exposed
from internal
metal
structures
or
.
It
calls
attention
performed
It
calls
attention
to
performed
or
all
of
the
product.
listed below
this symbol
(chassis)
.
external
to
a
procedure
or
adhered
a
procedure
or
adhered
when it
of
the
sources
,
to
,
,
to
,
.
is
by
practice
could
practice
could
,
,
Note
practice
Axed
denotes
,
condition
to
procedures
important
product
to
prevent
information.
or
the
like
containing
electrostatic
,
which
static
It
calls
is
essential
sensitive
discharge
attention
to
highlight.
devices
damage
to
a
procedure
use
anti-static
to
component.
,
handling
viii
Page 9
Documentation Map
The
following
T
ask Reference
Task
step-by-step
manuals
are
(Agilent P
Reference helps
instruction,
available for
the analyzer
art Number
you to
learn how
without concepts
.
04396-90030)
to use
the analyzer
.
.
manual
provide
simple
User's
Guide
The
make
(Agilent
User's
basic
Guide
measurements
measurement
Function Reference
Function
softkeys
system
Programming
The
controller
GPIB
Command Reference
GPIB
information
HP
instrument
The
Reference
,
and
performance
Guide
Programming
by
Command
on
BASIC
HP
instrument
programming
provide
B
ASIC
instrument
a
general
Programming
B
P
art
walks
examples
(Agilent P
describes
provides
,
(Agilent
Guide
GPIB
.
Reference
status
Users
B
language
programming
ASIC
Language
Number
you
through
,
explains
.
After
art
information
and
some
P
art
shows
(Agilent P
provides
reporting
Handbook
ASIC
Users
,
provide
T
echniques
04396-90031)
system
commonly
you
receive
Number
all
topics
04396-90052)
function
on
options
about
Number
how
to
make
art
Number
a
summary
structure
(Agilent
Handbook
some
helpful
reference
,
HP
instrument
R
eference
.
setup
and
used
features
your
analyzer
accessed
from
and accessories
the
analyzer's
04396-90043)
basic
program
04396-90044)
of
all
and
trigger
P
art
Number
introduces
hints
on
.
It
is
divided
B
ASIC
initial
,
begin
the front
features.
to
available
system
E2083-90000)
you
to
getting
into
Interface
power-on,
,
and
typical
with
panel keys
available,
control the
GPIB
correspond
the
HP
the
most
three
books
T
echniques
shows
application
this
manual.
specications,
analyzer by
command,
to
SCPI.
instrument
use
from
,
HP
instrument
how
and
,
and
B
it,
and
to
a
ASIC
and
HP
P
erformance T
The
specications
Service
Manual
The
est Manual
P
erformance
T
.
(Option 0B
Service Manual
This manual is option 0BW only
(Agilent P
est
Manual
W only),
explains how
art Number
explains
(Agilent P
to adjust,
.
04396-90130)
how
to
art Number
troubleshoot,
verify
conformance
04396-90121)
and
repair
to
published
the
instrument.
ix
Page 10
Page 11
Contents
1.
General
INTRODUCTION
ABOUT
Manual
PERFORMANCE
CALIBRA
CALCULA
Calculation
P
How
RECOMMENDED TEST
Calibration
2.
P
erformance
INTRODUCTION
1.
Description
Specication
T
Procedure
2.
Description
Specication
T
Procedure
3.
Description
Specication
T
Procedure
4.
Description .............
Specication.. ...... ...... ..... ...
Test Equipment ...... ...... ...... ...
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.
Description
Specication .
Test Equipment
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
6. RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST (NA) ...... ...... ...... . 2-16
Description ................................ 2-16
Specication.. ...... ...... ..... ...... ...... . 2-16
Test Equipment ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 2-16
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
7. INPUT CROSSTALK TEST (NA) .. ...... ..... ...... ... 2-20
Information
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
THIS
MANU
Organization
TION
TION
erformance
to
Use
Data
FREQUENCY
est
Equipment
.
SOURCE
est
NON-SWEEP
est Equipment
POWER
HARMONICS/NON-HARMONIC SPURIOUS TEST (NA) . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEVEL
Equipment
.
..
SWEEP
AL
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
TESTS
CY
CLE
SHEET
Sheet
T
est
.
.
Required
T
ests
.
A
CCURA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
POWER
.
.
..
..
.........................
.........................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
AND
PERFORMANCE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Record
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
CCURA
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
LINEARITY
...... ...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
EQUIPMENT .
for
Step
.
.
.
.
.
.
CY
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CY/FLA
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
..
.
..
..
..
LINEARITY
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
(NA)
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
TNESS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
TEST
RECORD
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Attenuator
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(NA)
.....................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
(NA)
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(NA) .
.
.
.
.
...... ...... ...... .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
..........
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
.........
.........
...... .
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
1-1
.
1-1
.
1-1
.
1-2
.
1-3
1-3
.
1-3
.
1-3
.
1-3
. 1-4
.
1-5
.
2-1
.
2-2
.
2-2
.
2-2
.
2-2
.
2-2
.
2-4
.
2-4
. 2-4
. 2-4
2-4
.
2-6
. 2-6
.
2-6
.
2-6
2-6
.
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-12
Contents-1
Page 12
Description
Specication
T
est Equipment
Procedure
8.
INPUT IMPED
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
9.
ABSOLUTE
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
10.
MA
GNITUDE
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
11.
MA
GNITUDE
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
12.
CALIBRA
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
13.
DISPLA
Description
Specication
T
est Equipment
Procedure
14.
AMPLITUDE
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
15.
INPUT
Description .........
Specication . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment
Procedure..... ...... .
16. RESOLUTION B
Description ......................
Specication.......................
Test Equipment
Procedure..... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... 2-59
17. RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST (SA) . . . . . 2-63
Description ....... ..... ...... ...... ...... .. 2-63
Specication................................ 2-63
Test Equipment .............................. 2-63
Procedure..... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... 2-63
18. IF GAIN SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
..
..
..
.
ANCE
..
.
.
.
.
.
AMPLITUDE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RA
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
TOR
AMPLITUDE A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
YED
A
VERA
..
..
.
.
.
FIDELITY
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
TTENU
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
TEST
(NA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
CCURA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TIO/PHASE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TIO/PHASE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
GE
NOISE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
A
TOR SWITCHING
...... ...
ANDWIDTH A
...... ..... ...... .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
CY
TEST
(NA)
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
..
DYNAMIC
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
FREQUENCY
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
CCURACY
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LEVEL
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.......................
......................
CCURACY/SELECTIVITY TEST (SA)
A
CCURA
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
RESPONSE
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
UNCERT
.... ...... ...... .....
.....................
..
.
.
.
.
CY
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
AINTY
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
(NA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
...... ....
...... ...
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(NA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.....
........
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2-53
.
.
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-31
2-31
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-49
2-49
2-49
2-49
2-49
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-52
2-52
2-52
2-52
2-56
2-56
2-56
2-56
2-56
2-59
2-59
2-59
2-59
Contents-2
Page 13
Description
Specication
T
est Equipment
Procedure
19.
NOISE SIDEB
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
20.
FREQUENCY
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
21.
SECOND
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
22.
THIRD
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
23.
OTHER
Description
Specication
T
est
Equipment
Procedure
24.
RESIDU
Description
Specication
T
est Equipment
Procedure
..
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
ANDS
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RESPONSE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
HARMONIC
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ORDER
SPURIOUS
AL
INTERMODULA
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RESPONSE
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DISTORTION
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
(SA) .
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
..
..
.
.
.
..
.
TION
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
TEST
.
..
..
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
DISTORTION
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
(SA)
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SA)
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-65
.
2-65
.
2-65
.
2-66
2-69
.
2-69
.
2-69
.
2-69
.
2-69
.
2-73
.
2-73
.
2-73
.
2-73
.
2-73
.
2-78
.
2-78
.
2-78
.
2-78
.
2-78
.
2-80
.
2-80
.
2-80
.
2-80
.
2-80
. 2-83
.
2-83
.
2-83
.
2-83
.
2-83
.
2-86
.
2-86
.
2-86
.
2-86
.
2-86
3.
Calculation
INTRODUCTION
2.
SOURCE
3.
NON
Step
Reference (0 dBm) . . . . . . .
Non Sweep P
4. POWER SWEEP LINEARITY TEST . . . . . . .
Step Attenuator Calibration V
6. RECEIVER NOISE LEVEL TEST
At IF BW 10 Hz
At IF BW 40 kHz
9. ABSOLUTE AMPLITUDE A
R input .. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. 3-6
Ainput .................................. 3-6
B input .... ...... ...... ...... ..... ...... . 3-6
10. MAGNITUDE RATIO/PHASE DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST ......... 3-7
Step Attenuator Calibration Value at 50 MHz .. ...... ...... .. 3-7
A/R Measurement ............................. 3-7
B/R Measurement ...... ...... ..... ...... ...... 3-7
Sheet
LEVEL
SWEEP
Attenuator
ower Linearity
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
FLA
TNESS
POWER
LINEARITY
Calibration
...... ...... ......
...... ...... ...... .
TEST
V
alue
......
alue at 50 MHz
CCURACYTEST...... ...... .....
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
at 50
...... ...... ...... ....
...... ...... .....
..
..
MHz
.
..................
...... ...... ..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..............
.....
...... ......
..........
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-2
3-3
Contents-3
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
Page 14
13.
DISPLAYED
14.
AMPLITUDE FIDELITY
Step
Attenuator Calibration
At
RBW 10
At
RBW 1
15.
INPUT A
Step
Attenuator
Input
Attenuator
16.
RESOLUTION
RBW
Selectivity
18.
IF
GAIN
10
dB
Step
1
dB
Step
IF
Gain
Switching
20.
FREQUENCY
Reference
At
Frequencies
At
Frequencies
22.
THIRD
4.
P
erformance
1.
FREQUENCY
without
with
Option
2.
SOURCE
Level
A
ccuracy
Level
Flatness
3.
NON
SWEEP
4.
POWER
5.
HARMONICS/NON-HARMONIC
Harmonics
Non-Harmonic
6.
RECEIVER
At
IF
BW
At
IF
BW
7.
INPUT
8.
INPUT
9.
ABSOLUTE
Input
Input
InputB ........
10. MA
A/R Measurement
B/R Measurement
11. MAGNITUDE RA
A/R Measurement .....................
B/R Measurement
12. CALIBRA
13. DISPLAYED AVERAGE NOISE LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
14. AMPLITUDE FIDELITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
At RBW 10 kHz ... ...... ..... ...... ...... .... 4-12
At RBW 1 MHz ........ ...... ...... ...... .... 4-12
15. INPUT ATTENUATOR SWITCHING UNCERTAINTY TEST . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
16. RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY/SELECTIVITY TEST . . . . . . . . 4-13
Bandwidth Accuracy....... ...... ...... ..... .... 4-13
CROSST
IMPED
R
A
GNITUDE RA
AVERA
kHz
MHz
TTENU
SWITCHING
Attenuator
Attenuator
at
20
ORDER
T
est
A
Option
1D5
LEVEL
.
POWER
SWEEP
..
Spurious .
NOISE
10
Hz
40
kHz
ANCE
AMPLITUDE
.
.
.
.
.
.
TOR AMPLITUDE A
GE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A
TOR
Calibration
Switching
B
ANDWIDTH
.
.
.
.
UNCERT
Calibration
Calibration
Uncertainty
RESPONSE
MHz
.
.
100
kHz
<
100
kHz
INTERMODULA
Record
CCURA
1D5
.
ALK
.
..
CY
..
..
..
ACCURA
.
.
..
.
.
..
LINEARITY
LINEARITY
.
.
.
.
LEVEL
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
TEST
..
..
.
.
.
TIO/PHASE DYNAMIC A
..........
....................
TIO/PHASE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST
......................
NOISE
.
.
SWITCHING
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
...... ...... ...... ..... ..
LEVEL
.
.
.
.
.
V
alue
at
50
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
UNCERT
V
alue
at
50
Uncertainty
A
CCURA
.
.
.
.
.
.
AINTY
V
alue
V
alue
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
TEST
.
CY/FLATNESS
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
A
CCURA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
TION
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SPURIOUS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CY
..
..
.
.
.
.
CCURACY TEST
TEST
.
MHz
MHz
CY/SELECTIVITY
TEST
at
.
DISTORTION
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
AINTY
.
.
.
.
.
..
at
50
MHz
50
MHz
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
CCURACY TEST
...................
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
TEST
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...... ...... ...
.
.
.
.
TEST
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
...... ..
.........
........
........
.......
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
. 3-8
3-9
3-9
.
3-9
.
3-9
3-10
.
3-10
3-10
3-11
.
3-11
.
3-12
.
3-12
.
3-12
.
3-12
.
3-13
.
3-13
.
3-13
.
3-13
3-14
.
4-1
. 4-1
.
4-1
.
4-2
.
4-2
.
4-2
. 4-2
4-3
.
4-4
.
4-4
4-4
.
4-5
.
4-5
.
4-6
.
4-7
.
4-7
4-8
. 4-8
.
4-8
. 4-8
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
Contents-4
Page 15
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
A.
Manual
Introduction
Manual
Serial
Index
Selectivity
RESOLUTION B
IF GAIN
NOISE SIDEB
..
..
.
ANDWIDTH
SWITCHING
ANDS
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
SECOND HARMONIC
THIRD
OTHER
RESIDU
ORDER
INTERMODULA
SPURIOUS
AL
RESPONSE
Changes
.
.
.
.
.
Changes
Number
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
UNCERT
TEST
.
TEST
DISTORTION
TEST
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SWITCHING
AINTY
.
.
TEST
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEST
TION
DISTORTION
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
UNCERT
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
AINTY
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
TEST
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
TEST
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-14
. 4-14
.
.
..
..
. 4-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-13
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
A
-1
A
-1
A
-2
Contents-5
Page 16
Figures
2-1. Frequency
2-2. Source
2-3. Non-sweep
2-4. P
ower
2-5. Harmonics
2-6.
Receiver
2-7.
Input
2-8.
Input
2-9.
Input
2-10.
Impedance
2-11.
Absolute
2-12.
A/R
Magnitude
2-13. A/R
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
2-24.
2-25.
2-26.
2-27.
2-28.
2-29.
2-30.
2-31.
2-32. Residual Response T
A-1. Serial Number Plate
Magnitude
B/R
Magnitude
B/R
Magnitude
A/R
Magnitude
B/R
Magnitude
Calibrator
A
verage
Amplitude
Input
RBW
RBW
IF
Gain
Noise
Frequency
Frequency Response
Frequency Response
Second Harmonics
Third Order
Other
A
ccuracy
Level
A
P
ower
Sweep
Crosstalk
Crosstalk
Crosstalk
Attenuator
A
ccuracy
Switching
Sidebands
Spurious
Linearity
T
est
Noise
T
est
Amplitude
Amplitude
Noise
Fidelity
Switching
Response
Intermodulation Distortion
ccuracy/Flatness
Linearity
Setup
Level
T
est
T
est
T
est
Setup
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Level
A
and
Uncertainty
Uncertainty
T
est
T
est
T
est
Setup
T
est
.
.
T
est
Setup
Setup
Setup
.
.
A
ccuracy
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
T
est
Setup
ccuracy
Selectivity
Setup
T
est
Setup
Test
Setup 2
Test
Setup 3
Distortion T
Setup
est Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.........................
.
T
est
T
est
Setup
Setup
.
.
.
Setup
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
.
.
.
T
est
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Frequency
Frequency
T
est
.
.
T
est
Setup
T
est
T
est
Setup
T
est
.
..
1
est Setup
.
.
.
.
.
Setup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setup
A
A
A
A
Setup
.
.
.
.
Setup
Setup
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ccuracy
ccuracy
ccuracy
ccuracy
Response
Response
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
Test
Setup .
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
T
est
T
est
T
est
T
est
T
T
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
Setup
Setup
Setup
Setup
est
est
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
Setup
Setup
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
1
.
.
2
.
.
1
.
.
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.........
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
2-3
2-4
2-7
.
2-10
.
2-12
.
2-17
.
2-21
.
2-22
.
2-23
.
2-26
.
2-29
. 2-33
. 2-35
.
2-37
.
2-39
.
2-42
.
2-45
.
2-49
.
2-50
.
2-53
.
2-57
.
2-60
.
2-63
.
2-66
.
2-70
.
2-74
. 2-76
. 2-77
.
2-79
.
2-81
.
2-83
2-86
A-2
Contents-6
Page 17
T
ables
1-1. P
erformance T
1-2.
Recommended
1-3.
Calibration
1-4.
Calibration
2-1.
Source
2-2.
Non-Sweep
2-3.
P
2-4.
Harmonics
2-5.
Non-Harmonic
2-6.
Receiver
2-7.
Receiver
2-8. Absolute
2-9.
A/R
2-10.
A/R
2-11.
B/R
2-12.
B/R
2-13.
Displayed
2-14.
Amplitude
2-15.
Amplitude
2-16.
Input
2-17.
RBW
2-18.
RBW
2-19.
RBW
2-20.
IF
2-21.
Noise
2-22.
Frequency
2-23.
Frequency
2-24.
Third
2-25.
Other Spurious
2-26.
Other Spurious
2-27.
Residual Response
A-1. Manual Changes by Serial Number
A-2. Manual Changes by ROM V
ower
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
A
Selectivity
Switching
Gain
Level
Sweep
Attenuator
ccuracy
Sideband
Order
ests
T
est
Data
Required
Data
Required
Flatness
P
ower
Linearity
T
est
Settings
Spurious
Noise
T
est
Noise
T
est
Amplitude A
A
ccuracy
A
ccuracy
A
ccuracy
A
ccuracy
A
verage
Fidelity
Fidelity
Switching
T
est
T
est
Uncertainty
Switching
Test
Response
Response
Intermodulation
Test
Test
.
.
.
Equipment
T
est
Linearity
T
est
T
est
Settings
Settings
ccuracy
T
est
T
est
T
est
T
est
Noise
Uncertainty
Test
Level
T
est
Settings
T
est
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings .
Test
Settings 1
T
est
Settings 1
Settings
Settings
Settings .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
for
8496A/G
for
8494A/G
Settings
T
est
Settings
Settings
.
.
.
.
Settings
.
.
2
.
T
est
Settings
Settings
Settings
Settings
T
est
1
2
Uncertainty
.
.
.
.
T
est
Settings
Test
..
T
est Settings
.
.
2
.
ersion ......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Settings
1
.
.
2
.
.
1
.
.
.
2
.
.
.
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
T
est
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
Settings .
..
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
......
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Settings
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
................
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.... ...... .....
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
. 2-87
1-2
1-4
1-6
1-6
2-5
2-7
2-10
2-13
2-14
2-18
2-18
2-30
2-34
2-36
2-38
2-40
2-51
2-54
2-55
2-58
2-61
2-62
2-64
2-67
2-70
2-75
2-77
2-82
2-84
2-85
A-1
A-1
Contents-7
Page 18
Page 19
1
General
Information
INTRODUCTION
chapter provides
Analyzer
calibration
in
test procedures
(analyzer) performance
cycle,
ABOUT THIS
manual
tests
are
Manual
manual
Chapter
Chapter
performance
and
the
contains
used
to
Organization
contains
1.
General
1
describes
test
performance
an overview
calculation sheets
of this
MANU
the
verify
the
Information
this
record,
tests
manual.
AL
performance
that
the
analyzer's
following
manual,
and
lists
.
of the
tests.
and
chapters:
the
analyzer's
the
test
manual and
In addition,
this chapter
performance
test
procedures
performance
performance tests
equipment required
4396B
test
for
meets
Network/Spectrum/Impedance
describes
record,
the
and
analyzer
its specications
,
calculation
for
the
the
analyzer
test
equipment
. These
sheet
preventive
performance
.
maintenance
required
and
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
calculations
Chapter
Chapter
2.
P
erformance
2
provides
3. Calculation
3 provides
to determine
4. P
erformance T
4 provides a performance test record. The record sheets for all test results are
provided.
The manual also
all
the
a calculation
contains
T
ests
performance test
procedures.
Sheet
the nal
sheet for
test result.
those
performance
est Record
Appendix A, Manual Changes
tests
that
require
additional
.
General Information 1-1
Page 20
PERFORMANCE TESTS
The
analyzer's
that
the
analyzer's
R
eference
The
analyzer's
analyzer
indicates
All
tests
tests
can
performance
performance
for
the
performance
mode
and
to
which
can
be
be
used
specications
tests
performance
meets the
specications.
is
categorized
performance
group
the listed
in the
performed without
to perform
incoming inspection,
after
repair
T
Test
Number T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
21
22
23
24
Frequency
Source
Level
Non-sweep
P
ower
Sweep
Harmonics/Non-harmonic
Receiver
Input
Crosstalk
Input
Impedance
Absolute
Magnitude
Magnitude
Calibrator
Displayed
Amplitude
Input Attenuator
Resolution Bandwidth
Resolution Bandwidth
IF
Gain
Switching
Noise
Sidebands
Frequency
Second
Third
Harmonic
Order
Other Spurious
Residual
consist of
the 24
guaranteed specications
into
two
spectrum analyzer
performance test
access to
the interior
.
able
1-1. P
erformance T
est
A
ccuracy
A
Linearity
T
est
ccuracy/Flatness
T
est
Linearity
Noise
Level
T
est
T
est
Test
Amplitude
Accuracy
Ratio/Phase
Ratio/Phase
Amplitude
A
verage
Fidelity
A
Noise
T
est
Switching
A
Switching
Uncertainty
T
est
Response
T
est
Distortion
Intermodulation
T
est
Response
T
est
tests listed
groups;
in T
performance in
mode.
belongs.
of the
and to
instrument.
verify that
ests
Name
T
est
T
est
T
est
Test
Dynamic
Frequency
ccuracy
Level
A
ccuracy T
Response
T
est SA
T
est
Uncertainty
ccuracy/Selectivity
Uncertainty
T
est
T
est
Distortion
able 1-1
.See
The third
the
est
Test
T
est
T
est
T
T
est
. These
the
the network
column
The
analyzer
Category
est
tests verify
Function
in
performance
meets
1
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
T
able
1-1
1
: NA: Network Analyzer Mode
The test numbers in
performing tests
order listed in T
. When performing
able 1-1
Table 1-1 are numbered according to the recommended sequence of
. The rst test failed indicates the problem you should troubleshoot
, SA: Spectrum Analyzer Mode
more than one performance test, perform them in the
rst.
If the performance tests indicate that the analyzer is not operating within the specied limits
check the test setup. If the test setup is correct, see the
chapter or the
Troubleshooting
chapter in the
4396B Service Manual
Adjustments and Correction Constants
for corrective action.
1-2 General Information
,
Page 21
Note
Allow
of
the
P
erform
the
analyzer
performance
all
performance
to
tests
warm
.
tests
up
for
at least
in
an
ambient temperature
30 minutes
before you
of 23
6
execute any
C.
5
CALIBRA
The
analyzer
of
performance
which
performance
the
analyzer
tests
CALCULA
The
Calculation
Chapter
4.
Calculation
Use
the
calculation
performance
which
P
The
calculations
erformance
performance
test
uncertainties
analyzer's
specications
measurement
TION
requires
verication
CY
periodic
is
used.
CLE
depends
contained
TION
Sheet
SHEET
and
P
erformance
Sheet
sheet
as
results
T
test
(if
applicable).
are
est
.
Calculation
required
Record
record
are
uncertainties are
performance
V
erify
the
in
this
manual.
AND
an
aid
for
to
obtain
lists
all
The
measurement
measured
valid only
verication
on
the
operating
analyzer's
performance
PERFORMANCE
T
est
recording
sheet
the
test
points
Record
entries
test
tables
raw
are
results
,
acceptable
uncertainty
and
depends
when the
on
recommended equipment
to
remain
and
environmental
at
are
provided
measurement
provided
only
.
test
limits,
shows
the
test
equipment
in
calibration.
conditions
least
once a
TEST
in
Chapter
data
and
for performance
and measurement
how
accurately
used.
The
frequency
under
year using
RECORD
3
and
calculating
tests
the
The listed
is
used.
the
the
in
How
The
performance test
to
Use
following
procedure is
record:
recommended when
using the
calculation sheet
and
the
1. Make extra copies of the calculation sheet and the performance test record.
2. F
ollow the performance test procedure and
column in the calculation sheet. F
or tests where
provided, record the measured values directly in the performance test
3. Calculate the test result using the appropriate equation given in
Record the test results in the TEST RESUL
4. When appropriate
, copy the test results from the calculation sheet to the performance test
record the measured data in the specied
no calculation sheet entry spaces are
record.
the calculation sheet.
T column in the
calculation sheet.
record.
5. Keep the performance test record for tracking gradual changes in test results over long
periods of time.
General Information 1-3
Page 22
RECOMMENDED TEST
T
able
1-2
lists
may
T
able
be
substituted
1-2
.
the equipment
if
the equipment
required for
T
able
1-2.
EQUIPMENT
performance testing
meets or
exceeds the
Recommended
the analyzer
critical specications
Test
Equipment
. Other
given in
equipment
Equipment Critical
Frequency
Counter
Frequency Standard
Spectrum
Network
P
ower
Analyzer
Analyzer
Meter
2
Frequency
6
1.9
Frequency: 10
6
1
2
Frequency
Frequency
No
substitute
10
Specications
Range:
1
GHz,
100
300
Time
kHz
kHz
Time Base
Base
to
to
0
7
/year
2
10
10
MHz,
/year
0
Range:
Range:
Error:
4
GHz
1.8
Error:
GHz
5343A
Recommended
Agilent
Opt.
Part
001
Model/
Number
1
5061B 1
8566A/B 1
8753A/B/C 1
436A
Opt.
022
,
437B
,
438A
P
ower
Sensor
P
ower
Sensor
Function
Signal
Step
Step
Genarator
Generator
Attenuator
Attenuator
3
3
Attenuator/Switch
Frequency
0
20
dBm
Frequency
0
60
dBm
Frequency
A
ccuracy:
Frequency
Phase
Noise
SSB
Phase
dBc/Hz,
Harmonics:
Attenuation
dB
,
VSWR:
Attenuation
VSWR:
No
substitute
Range
to
+5
Range
to
0
20
Range
6
0.2
Range
at
Noise at
Range
1.02
Range:
1.02
dBm
dB
1
:
:
dBm
:
,
:
kHz
:
20
MHz
50
MHz
10
Hz
Return
100
oset:
10
kHz
<
0
0
dB
0
dB
kHz
30
to
to
to
10
loss:
to
oset:
dBc
to
to 10
1.8
GHz,
Power:
1.8
GHz, P
ower:
kHz,
Level
>
20
dB
1.82
GHz,
<
0
110
dBc/Hz,
<
0
119
70
dB,
Step: 10
dB,
Step:
8482A 1
8481D 1
3325A 1
8663A
or
SSB
1
dB
,
8496A/G
H60
8494A/G
H60
11713A
8642B
Option
4
Option
5
6
001
001
and
and
Driver
50
Type-N
Calibration
No
substitute
85032B 1
Kit
T/R
T
est
Set
Frequency
Range:
300
kHz
to
1.8
GHz,
85044A 1
Directivity:40 dB
50 MHz
Low P
ass Filter
Rejection at
75 MHz:
60 dB
Termination 50 termination, type-N(m) 909C Opt 012 or part of
PN 0955-0306 1
7
85032B
Qty
1
or
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
Option 001 (optional time base) is not required, when a frequency standard in T
2
Required for testing an analyzer equipped with Option 1D5 (High Stability Frequency Reference).
3
Calibration values at
Attenuators
4
An 8496A/G step attenuator with required low VSWR (1.02) can be purchased by specifying option H60.
5
An 8494A/G step attenuator with required low VSWR (1.02) can be purchased by specifying option H60.
6
Required when an 8494G or 8496G step attenuator is used in the tests.
7
The 85032B includes a type-N(m) 50 termination.
50 MHz are required in the tests
later in this chapter.
. See the
Calibration Data R
able 1-2 is available
equired for Step
1-4 General Information
.
Page 23
T
able 1-2.
Recommended T
est
Equipment
(continued)
Equipment Critical
6
dB Fixed
6dB
Two-way
Attenuation
Fixed Attenuation
Power
Splitter
Cables N(m)-N(m)
50
, N(m)-N(f)
50 ,
N(m)-N(f), VSWR
Frequency
Tracking:
Range: 100
0.15
cable
RF
cable
kit
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
dB
,
50
cable
cable
Adapters BNC(f)-BNC(f) adapter
BNC(f)-SMA(f)
T
ee
BNC(m)-(f)-(f)
N(m)-N(m)
N(m)-BNC(f)
N(f)-BNC(m) adapter
APC
3.5(m)-APC
APC
7-N(f)
1
An
8491A
Opt.
006
xed
attenuator
adapter,
adapter
adapter
adapter
with
adapter
,
50
,50
,50
3.5(f)
,
50
required
H60.
2
The
11851B
3
The
85032B
includes
includes
three
two
N(m)-N(m)
APC
7-N(f)
cables
adapters
Specications
1.015
kHz
to
1.8
,
61
cm, 50
,
122 cm,
,50
50
50
,
50
adapter
,
50
low
VSWR
of
61
cm
and
.
GHz,
(
a
N(m)-N(m)
Output
1.015)
Recommended
Agilent P
8491A
Opt 006
8491A Opt
art
006 &
Model/
Number
Opt H60
1
11667A 1
11500B
or
part
of
11851B
2
11851B 1
PN
8120-1839
PN
8120-1840
PN 1250-0080 1
PN
1250-0562
PN
1250-0781
PN
1250-1475
PN
1250-1476
PN 1250-1477 1
PN
1250-1866
11524A
can
cable
be
purchased
of
88
or
part
cm.
of
by
85032B
specifying
3
Qty
2
2
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Opt.
Calibration
The
six
performance
standard
(the
attenuation
Data
Required
tests
listed
values
for
below
at
a
Step
measure
frequency
Attenuator
the
analyzer's
50
MHz
of
performance
the
8496A/G
and
against
8494A/G
a
known
step
attenuators).
3.
Non-Sweep
4.
P
ower
10.
Magnitude
14.
Amplitude
15. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty T
18. IF Gain Switching Uncertainty T
These tests require the calibrated values of the attenuators listed in T
Sweep
P
ower
Linearity
Linearity
Ratio/Phase
Fidelity
T
T
est
Dynamic
est
T
est
A
ccuracy T
est
est
est
able 1-3 and T
able 1-4.
The attenuation values (referenced to 0 dB setting) are required in the calculation sheet. The
attenuation values used in the tests are listed in each calculation sheet.
General Information 1-5
Page 24
The
calibration
The
measurement
only
when
of
T
able
1-3
uncertainty
the
uncertainty
and
T
T
able 1-3.
Frequency Attenuation Uncertainty
T
able
1-4.
Frequency Attenuation Uncertainty
is
uncertainties
of
able
1-4
.
Calibration Data
50
MHz
Calibration
50
MHz
the
listed
the
primary
source
in
the
attenuation
Required
10
dB
20 dB
30
dB
40 dB
50
dB
60 dB
70
dB
Data
Required
2
dB
4
dB
6
dB
8
dB
10
dB
of
measurement
performance
data
for
0.0060
0.0060
0.0066 dB
0.0090
0.0165 dB
0.0197
0.0272
for
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.007
0.007
test
satises
8496A/G
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
8494A/G
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
error
record
that
in
of
Chapter
given
performance
4
are
in
the
third column
tests
valid
.
The
calibration
T
echnologies
your
nearest
Note
Note
of
.
F
or
Agilent
The
segment,
dB
dB
When
segments
in
The
attenuators
information
T
echnologies
8496G
programmable
20
to 70
dB is
to 70
dB depend
setting
for attenuations
the tests
8494G
.
programmable
,
8496A/G
about
the
service
dB
segment, and
obtained by
on the
the
step attenuator
and
8494A/G
calibration
center
step
and
.
attenuator
two 40
combining these
40 dB
segment
for the
from
40
dB
step
attenuator has
dB
to
segment, 2 dB segment, and two 4 dB segments
by combining these segments
. The attenuations of 4 dB and 6 dB depend on
the 4 dB segment that is used.
When setting
segment for attenuations
the tests
the step attenuator for the calibration, specify one of the 4 dB
of 4 dB and 6 dB
.
,are
available
the available
has
four
segments
.
segments
that
is
used.
calibration, specify
70
dB
.
Then
four
at
Agilent
uncertainties
attenuation
Each
attenuation
.
The
attenuations
use
the
attenuation
,
segments
one
of
specied
segments
contact
from
the
segment
. Each attenuation is obtained
. Then use the specied segment in
,
10
from
40
,
1
dB
10
40
dB
dB
1-6 General Information
Page 25
P
erformance T
INTRODUCTION
chapter contains
are
described sequentially
The
test name
performance
mode
performance group
mode
performance group
Each
procedure
indicates the
belongs to
the performance
consists
.
NA
.
.
of
ests
in the
tested
indicates
S
A
indicates
the
following
test procedures
following pages
performance
the
performance
the
performance
parts:
.
and
. The
to
which
test
test
test
procedures
performance
belongs
to
belongs
to
the
the
listed
group
network
spectrum
in
T
able
the
tested
analyzer
analyzer
2
1-1
Description:
Specication:
T
est
Equipment:
Procedure:
Note
Note
Allow
of
P
Before
Chapter
in
the
the
performance
erform
the
test
performing
3
CALCULA
describes
describes
describes
describes
analyzer
all
performance
and
the
procedure
TION
SHEET
the
test procedure
the
performance
test
equipment
the
test
procedure
to
warm
up
tests
.
tests
any
tests
,
make
performance
.
F
or
an
AND
PERFORMANCE
.
veried
required
for
at
least
in
an ambient
extra
copies
test
record
explanation of
in
the
test.
in
the test.
by
.
30
minutes
temperature
of
the
in
Chapter
how to
TEST
before you
of
calculation
4.
These
use
these
RECORD
23
6
are
records
in
execute any
C.
5
sheet
in
required
,
see
the
Chapter 1.
Performance Tests 2-1
Page 26
1. FREQUENCY
Description
test
uses a
when
it
is
reference
Specication
frequency counter
tuned
(or
the
to
high
1
GHz. This
ACCURA
stability
frequency
CY TEST
to measure
test checks
(NA)
the actual
the frequency
reference for
frequency of
accuracy of
Option 1D5).
the 4396B
the
internal
RF OUT
frequency
signal
Frequency
@23
6
Precision
@0C
T
est
Equipment
F
or
testing
Frequency
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
APC
3.5(m)-APC
N(m)-BNC(f)
BNC(f)-SMA(f)
F
or
testing
Frequency
Frequency
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
APC
3.5(m)-APC
BNC(f)-SMA(f)
1:
Option
0
7
10
/year
2:
This
adapter
the
test
adapter
CARE
3:
The
5061B
reference
C,
referenced
5
frequency
C,
to
55
a
standard 4396B
Counter
adapter
an
4396B
Counter
Standard
001
Time
Base
is available
is
used
setup
,
the
.
F
or
more information
(PN
08510-90064).
can
be
accuracy
to
reference
referenced
:
:
:
:
:
cable
,
61
3.5(f)
adapter
:
:
:
:
adapter
cable
cable
adapter
BNC(m)-SMA(f)
replaced
:
:
equipped
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
,61
,122
3.5(f) adapter
::
is
not
required,
as an
external frequency
to
protect
with any
C
:
:
accuracy
23
(not
:
:
:
::
:
::
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
:
:
:
:
5343A
adapter
10
:
C
::
::
:
:
:
2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
with
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2
:
:
:
:
when
MHz
23
to
:
:
cm
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
::
the
on microwave
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
equipped
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Opt.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
any
10
reference
's
APC
3.5(m)
is
connected
connectors and
frequency
:
::
::
::
(option
:
:
:
:
:
:
with
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1D5
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MHz
input
to
standard
::
:
:
:
:
1D5)
:
::
::
::
Opt.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
frequency
for
the
connector
the
5343A
connector care
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1D5)
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
standard with
frequency
,
sometimes called
's
APC
with
time
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
counter
3.5(m)
,
base
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
see
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
time base
.
input
MICRO
error
::
:
:
<
6
5.5
:
::
:<
6
0.13
:
:
:
:
:
5343A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
:
:
::
::
:
:
PN
:
:
:
:
::
::
PN
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
PN
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
PN 8120-1840
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
::
::
:
:
:
:
PN
error
\connector saver
connector
W
A
VE
CONNECTOR
of
<
6
1
x
ppm/year
ppm/year
Opt.
8120-1839
1250-1866
1250-1476
1250-0562
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
5061B
8120-1839
1250-1866
1250-0562
<
6
1.9
through
0
10
10
001
:
5343A
x
." In
/year
1
3
this
.
Procedure
1. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-1
For testing a standard 4396B (not equipped with Option 1D5),
the EXT REF input connector in the 4396B rear panel.
For testing an 4396B equipped with Option 1D5, connect a BNC(m)-BNC(m) cable between
the EXT REF input connector and the REF OVEN connector on the 4396B rear panel.
Then connect the frequency standard's 10 MHz connector to the frequency counter's EXT
FREQ STD connector as shown in Figure 2-1.
2-2 Performance Tests
.
do not connect any cable to
Page 27
Note
2.
Initialize
An
and
3.5(m)
adapter
the
frequency
Figure
2-1.
APC 3.5(m)-APC
the
5343A
's
APC
input
connector
is
mated
counter
with
.
Frequency
3.5(f)
3.5(m)
.
In
the
APC
Then
set
adapter
input
Figure
3.5
the
A
ccuracy
is
used
connector
2-1
,
the
connector
controls
T
est
between
to
SMA
of
as
follows:
Setup
the
BNC(f)-SMA(f)
protect
connector
the
dierent
the
5343A
of
the
adapter
's
APC
BNC(f)-SMA(f)
type
.
Controls
Sample
Range
Switch
INT/EXT
Rate
Switch (rear
panel) Internal
Settings
Midrange
500
MHz-26.5 MHz
or External
(when the
frequency standard
connected)
3.
Press
4
Meas
NNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANALYZER TYPE
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NETWORK ANALYZER
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
4
Preset
5
to initialize the
4396B. Then set
the controls as follows:
Control Settings
Center Frequency: 1 GHz
Frequency Span: ZERO
Key Strokes
5,4
5,4
4
Center
4
Span
1
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
ZERO SPAN
5
,
G/n
5
4. Wait for the frequency counter reading to settle.
5. Record the frequency counter reading to 1 Hz resolution in the performance test record
(\Test Result" column).
Performance Tests 2-3
is
Page 28
2. SOURCE
Description
test
uses a
OUT
0
as
dBm.
signal
power
at
several
The
level
deviation
Specication
LEVEL A
power meter
frequencies
accuracy
from
the
CCURACY/FLA
and a
power sensor
from
100 kHz
is
checked at
power
a frequency
reading taken
TNESS TEST
to measure
to 1.8
GHz when
50 MHz.
at 50
MHz.
the actual
the signal
The level
(NA)
power level
amplitude
atness
is
of
the
RF
is
set
calculated
to
Level
@23
accuracy
6
5
Flatness
@23
6
5
T
est
Equipment
P
ower
Meter
P
ower
Sensor
Procedure
1.
Connect
sensor
.
2.
Connect the
C,
C,
the
50
MHz,
relative
:
::
::
::
:
::
::
power
test
equipment
0
to
:
:
:
::
:
:
sensor
dBm
50
:
:
:
:
:
:
MHz,
:
:
:
:
to
:
output
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
the power
as
shown
dBm
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
in
:
:
:
::
output
::
::
::
::
::
meter.
Figure
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Calibrate
2-2
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
0.5
dB
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
6
1.0
dB
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
436A Opt.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
the
power
:
:
:
:
:
meter
:
:
022,
:
:
:
for
437B
:
:
the
:
:
,
:
:
:
:
::
power
or
438A
8482A
2-4 Performance Tests
Figure 2-2. Source Level Accuracy/Flatness Test Setup
Page 29
3.
Press
the
4
Meas
controls
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
ANALYZER
5
,
as
follows:
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
TYPE
N
N
N
NETWORK
,
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
N
,
4
Preset
5
to initialize
the 4396B
. Then
set
4.
5.
The
Source
a.
b.
Source
a.
b.
Control
Center
Frequency
IF
BW: 1
source
power
Level
Wait
for the
Record the
the
level
Level
Record the
Reading
Press
test
[ref]" column
4
Center
frequency
Settings
Frequency:
Span:
kHz
now
A
ccuracy
power meter
power meter
accuracy
Flatness T
test result
5
5
,
,
4
4
1
100
is
test).
5
,
0
kHz
50
0
Hz
set to
Test
est
of
for the
5
,
4
0
listed
T
able
4
MHz
0 dBm
reading to
reading in
the
level
level
5
to
2-1.
change
in
T
Source
k/m
K
ey
Strokes
5
5
,
,
4
Center
4
Span
4
Bw/Avg
4
5
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
ZERO
5
,
N
NN
NN
N
IF
5
,
(preset value).
settle
.
the performance
accuracy
atness
able 2-1
the
.
T
Level
test
test).
4396B
able
Flatness
4396B
Center
Frequency
100
100
400
700
1.3
1.6
1.8
4
N
N
N
10
5
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
BW
in
1
1
.
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
SPAN
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
2-1
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
M/
N
,
center
5
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
5
,
4
4
1
k/m
test
calculation
lists
T
5
record
(\T
sheet
frequency to
atness
est
test
Settings
est
Result"
(\P
the
frequencies
ower
rst
column
Meter
atness
.
for
c.
W
ait
for
the
power meter
sheet
(\P
ower
Meter
d.
Change
each frequency
the
4396B center
.
e. Calculate test results using
reading to
Reading"
column).
frequency in
the equation given in the calculation sheet. Record the test
results in the performance test record.
settle.
Then record
accordance with
the
Table
reading
2-1 and
in
the
calculation
repeat step
5-c for
Performance Tests 2-5
Page 30
3. NON-SWEEP
Description
test
uses a
of
the
4396B
The
power
In
this
test,
dBm
using
sensor's
the
attenuation
Specication
non-linearity
attenuation
power meter
RF
OUT
linearity
the
input
the step
used and
values
is
attenuator.
of
POWER
and a
signal
power
and noise
the
at several
referenced
to the
.The
the power
step attenuator
LINEARITY TEST
high sensitivity
power settings
to
apower
power sensor
This reduces
actual power
meter reading.
at 50
measurement uncertainty
power sensor
level of
is maintained
of the
MHz.
and then
0dBm.
RF
Therefore,
(NA)
to measure
calculates the
between
OUT
signal
this
test
0
60
caused
is
calculated
requires
the actual
power
dBm
by
the
linearity
and
the
calibrated
power
0
30
power
by
adding
.
Level
T
est
P
P
N(m)-N(m)
Step
Attenuator
Procedure
1.
linearity
1
Equipment
ower
Meter
ower
Sensor
Attenuator
1:
2:
Record the
V
alue"
column).
:
@23
cable
driver
Calibration
Required
C,
6
5
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
61
1
,
10
2
:
values
when
step attenuator
0
0
0
relative
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
cm
:
dB
:
:
:
:
:
using
Output
20
dBm
40
60
to
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
Step
:
::
for
power
dBm
power
dBm
power
0
dBm
output
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
attenuation settings
a
programmable
50
MHz
P
ower
+20
<
0
20
<
0
40
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
step
calibration
dBm
dBm
dBm
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
of 10
attenuator
::
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
VSWR
:
:
::
dB to
values
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
50 dB
8496G.
in
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
the
:
:
:
:
436A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1.02
8496A/G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
at
50
MHz
calculation
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
:
:
:
:
are
Linearity
6
0.7
6
1.0
6
1.5 dB
Opt.
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
::
required.
sheet
1
dB
dB
022
,
:
:
:
:
:
or
Option
::
:
:
:
:
437B
,
or
438A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8481D
of
11851B
001
and
H60
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11713A
(\Calibration
2. Connect the power sensor to the power meter
power sensor
3. Set the step attenuator to 50 dB before connecting the test equipment. This protects the
power sensor from excess input.
4. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-3.
2-6 Performance Tests
.
, and calibrate the power meter
for the
Page 31
Figure 2-3.
Non-sweep P
ower
Linearity
T
est
Setup
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press
the
controls as
Press
in
T
able
Set
the
W
ait
for
Record
column
N
N
N
ANALYZER
5
4
,
Meas
Control
Center
Frequency
5
4
Source
2-2
the
the
of
,
.
attenuator
power
power
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
follows:
Settings
Frequency:
Span:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
POWER
,
4
0
meter
meter
calculation
Table
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE
0
5
,
4
x1
to
the
reading
reading
sheet
N
N
50
Hz
N
N
N
N
N
,
5
to
NETWORK
MHz
set
rst
setting
to settle
in
for
N
the
the
the
2-2. Non-Sweep
4396B
Source P
+20 dBm 50 dB
+10
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
4
Center
4
5
,
Span
source
(30
5
5
,
,
4
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ZERO
power
dB) listed
N
,
5
4
0
N
NN
N
SPAN
4
,
N
N
N
N
Preset
4
M/
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
5
to
5
N
the
in the
rst
.
calculation
reference
Power
sheet.
(0
Linearity T
Step
Attenuator
Use \P
dBm).
est Settings
ower
0 dBm 30 dB
dBm
40
dB
10 dBm 20 dB
20 dBm 10 dB
30 dBm
10
dB
40 dBm 10 dB
50 dBm 10 dB
60 dBm 0dB
initialize
test
second
ower Meter
the
setting
column
4396B
(0
dBm)
of
Reading"
.
T
able
Then
listed
2-2
set
.
Performance Tests 2-7
Page 32
10.
Change the
T
able 2-2
Reading"
11.
Calculate the
results
source power
. Record
column of
test results
in the
performance test
setting and
the power
meter reading
the calculation
using the
the step
sheet for
equations given
record.
attenuator setting
in the
calculation sheet.
the non-sweep
in the
in accordance
Use
\P
power linearity
calculation sheet.
with
ower
test.
Record
Meter
the
test
2-8 Performance Tests
Page 33
4. PO
Description
dBm
actual
sweep
values
to
reduces
power
reading. Therefore
50 MHz.
Specication
WER SWEEP
test
sets the
to
+20
dBm
20
test
power
linearity
relative
dBm is
of
of
calculated using
uses a
the
measurement
the
RF
the
for
to the
step attenuator
OUT signal
4396B to
in
5
dB steps
4396B
a
sweep
stop power
,this
test requires
LINEARITY TEST
the power
. Using
RF
OUT signal
span
each measured
uncertainty
is calculated
sweep mode
a power
+20
dB is
. Therefore
to maintain
caused by
the
meter and
at each
calculated. The
,the
power as
the power
by adding
calibrated
(NA)
and then
a
sweep point
power
the power
linearity
a
stop
sensor
the
attenuation
attenuation
makes a
high
is measured.
power linearity
power
input
sensor's linearity
power sweep
sensitivity
for
stop
.
level
used
values
of
powers
and
the
power
Then
is
0
30
error
the
step
from
sensor
the
power
specied
from
dBm.
.
The
power
attenuator
0
0
5
This
actual
meter
,
10
the
as
dBm
at
Sweep
Sweep
T
est
P
P
Step
Attenuator
N(m)-N(m)
Procedure
1.
2. Connect the power
3. Set the step attenuator to
range
linearity
@23
6
5
Equipment
ower
Meter
ower
Sensor
Attenuator
1:
2:
Record
V
alue"
power sensor
power sensor from excess input.
:
:
:
:
:
:
C,
50
MHz,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
,
10
2
,
step
.
:
61
when
attenuator
driver
cable
Calibration values
Required
the
column).
:
:
:
:
:
relative
::
:
:
:
:
::
dB
:
:
:
:
:
cm
:
using
sensor to the power meter
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
to
stop
power
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Step
,
VSWR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
for attenuation
a
programmable
50
40 dB before connecting the test equipment. This protects the
::
:
::
:
MHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
settings
calibration
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1.02
:
:
:
:
:
:
step
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
436A
Opt.
022
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8496A/G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
of
40
dB
and
50
dB
at
50
MHz
attenuator
. Then calibrate the power meter for the
values
8496G.
in
the
calculation
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
are
required.
sheet
Option
:
:
:
:
or
:
::
::
,
437B
:
:
:
:
:
001
:
::
:
:
part
(\Calibration
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
of
:
:
:
:
20
:
6
0.5
,or
:
:
:
8481D
and
:
:
11713A
11851B
dB
dB
438A
H60
4. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-4.
Performance Tests 2-9
Page 34
Figure 2-4.
Power
Sweep
Linearity
T
est
Setup
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5.
Press
4
Meas
the
controls as
6.
Press
4
T
power to the rst sweep point of
Verify that the step attenuator is set to 40 dB
ANALYZER
5
,
follows:
Control
Sweep
CW
Start P
Stop P
Number of
Manual
Trigger
rigger
Settings
Type:
Frequency:
ower:
ower: +20
Trigger
Event:
NN
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE
POWER
50
0
10
Points:
ON
NN
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
TRIGGER:[MANUAL]
,
Table 2-3. P
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MHz
dBm
dBm
7
POINT
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
SWEEP
N
NN
NN
Source P
NN
NETWORK
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
10 dBm listed in T
ower Sweep Linearity T
4396B
0
10 dBm 40 dB
0
5dBm 40 dB
0dBm 40 dB
+5 dBm 40 dB
+10 dBm 40 dB
+15 dBm 50 dB
+20 dBm 50 dB
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
ANALYZER
K
ey
4
Sw
eep
4
Source
4
Sta
rt
4
Stop
4
Sw
eep
4
T
rigger
4
T
rigger
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
TRIG EVENT
softkey label
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
ower
NN
Strokes
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
SWEEP
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
CW
5
,
5
,
5
,
4
4
-
5
,
5
,
4
4
2
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NUMBER
5
,
N
NN
NN
N
TRIGGER:
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
TRIGGER:[MANUAL]
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
to
start
.
Step Attenuator
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Preset
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE MENU
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
FREQ
,
5
,
5
,
4
1
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
0
5
,
5
4
x1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
of
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[ON SWEEP]
changes
a
power
able 2-3. T
5
to
initialize
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
4
5
5
x1
N
N
N
N
N
N
POINTS
N
N
NN
NN
[FREE RUN]
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
TRIG EVENT
to
sweep
able 2-3 lists test settings
est Settings
the
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
NN
N
N
5
5
7
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
and
,
4
x1
N
NN
N
N
MANUAL
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
to
POWER
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
NN
,
(Then the
N
N
N
N
4396B
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SWEEP
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
[ON
set the
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
.
Then
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
POINT]
4396B
set
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
)
.
2-10 Performance Tests
Page 35
7.
Wait
8.
Record the
9.
Repeat the
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
Calculate
results
for the
N
N
N
N
MANUAL
Press
The
sweep
indicator
Change
W
ait
for
Record
the
in
the
power meter
power meter
following steps
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
to
set the
indicator
indicates
the
step
the
the
power
test
attenuator
power
results
the
meter
meter
performance
reading to
reading in
until a
source power
moves
to
last
measurement
setting
reading
reading
using
the
test
record.
settle.
the calculation
power sweep
to the
the
last
measurement
point
to
the
to
settle
in
the
calculation
equation
sheet (\P
completed.
next measurement
point
on
the
next
setting
.
sheet.
given
in
the calculation
ower Meter
on
sweep
,
in the
Reading"
point listed
the
sweep
.
(The
not
the
current
second column
sheet. Record
column).
in T
able 2-3
sweep
point.)
of T
able 2-3
the test
.
.
Performance Tests 2-11
Page 36
5. HARMONICS/NON-HARMONIC
Description
test
sets the
to
measure
frequencies
spurious
are
the
.
RF
The
most
4396B RF
OUT
signal's
RF
OUT
likely
to
OUT signal
second harmonic
signal
frequency is
be
observed.
power to
set to
Specication
SPURIOUS TEST
+15 dBm
and non-harmonic
values where
and uses
harmonics and
a spectrum
spurious at
(NA)
analyzer
several
non-harmonic
Spectral
Purity
Harmonics
@+15
dBm
Non-harmonics
T
est
@+15
Equipment
dBm
Spectrum Analyzer
N(m)-N(m)
cable
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
Procedure
1.
Connect
the
Characteristics
output
spurious
output
:
:
:
:
:
,
61
cm
cable
,
122
test
equipment
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:<
0
30
dBc
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
<
0
30
dBc
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8566A/B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
as
:
:
:
:
:
shown
11500B
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
in
Figure
2-5
.
or
of
11851B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
8120-1840
Note
Connect the spectrum analyzer's 10 MHz frequency reference output to the
4396B EXT REF Input on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2-5. With this
conguration, both the spectrum analyzer and the 4396B are phase locked to
the same reference frequency to eliminate frequency oset errors.
2-12 Performance Tests
Figure 2-5. Harmonics Test Setup
Page 37
2.
Initialize the
calibration
3.
On the
spectrum analyzer
in accordance
spectrum analyzer
.When
with the
,set
the controls
an 8566B
spectrum analyzer
is used,
as follows:
perform the
manual.
FREQ
ZERO
4.
Press
4
the
controls
5.
|Harmonics
a.
On
center
Controls
Frequency
Reference
Input
Attenuator 50
N
NN
NN
NN
ANALYZER
5
,
Meas
as
Control
Frequency
Source
IF
the
P
BW:
1
T
4396B
frequency
Span 100
Level +20
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
TYPE
follows:
Settings
Span:
ower: +15
kHz
est|
,
press
4
listed
NN
NN
NN
N
N
0
Hz
Center
in
N
N
N
dBm
N
N
NETWORK
,
5
5
,
4
1
the
rst
T
able
Center
N
N
,
4
4396B
Settings
kHz
dBm
dB
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
4
5
,
Span
4
5
Source
4
Bw/Avg
5
5
,
,
4
4
k/m
0
0
column
2-4.
Harmonics
Frequency
100
kHz
500
MHz
1.8
GHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ZERO
N
N
N
N
POWER
,
NN
5
,
5
of
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
SPAN
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF BW
to
set
T
able
Second
5
Preset
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
1
N
N
N
,
4
the
2-4
T
est
N
N
5
,
5
1
to initialize
5
4
5
,
4
k/m
center
.
T
Settings
Harmonic
200
3.6
4
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Frequency
,
4
x1
able
1
5
5
kHz
GHz
GHz
the 4396B
frequency
2-4
lists test
. Then
to
the
rst
frequencies.
set
b.
On
the
spectrum
level
of
the
i. Press
ii. Press
iii. Press
iv.
v. Press
vi. Press
vii. Record the delta marker
c. On the 4396B, press
test frequency 500 MHz.
d. On the spectrum analyzer
level.
i. Press
ii. Press
iii. Press
iv. Press
v. Press
4
CENTER
value as
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK
and to
Press
4
CENTER FREQUENCY
second
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK SEARCH
column).
4
CENTER FREQUENCY
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK SEARCH
4
CENTER FREQUENCY
4
SINGLE
analyzer
rst
test
FREQUENCY
the 4396B
5
to
SEARCH
place the
harmonics
5
to make
5
to make a sweep.Wait for the completion of the sweep.
5
to make a sweep.Wait for the completion of the sweep.
frequency
make a
5
,
delta maker
frequency listed
5
4
Center
5,4
,
perform
5
center frequency
sweep.
5
to
4
1
5
asweep
to move the
5,4
5
, perform the following steps to measure the second harmonic
5,455,405,405,4
NORMAL
5,415,4
the
following steps
100
kHz.
,
5
,
5
,
5
,
5
4
4
1
move the
,
4
2
reading in the performance test record (\T
5,4
4
0
0
.
W
ait
reference at
5
,
5
,
5
,
4
4
0
0
in
.Wait for the completion of the sweep
marker to the peak of the second harmonic
5,4
5,4
0
5,415
0
GHz
M/
.
5
.
to
4
kHz
for
the
marker to
the
5
to
4
kHz
the
second
5
to set the center frequency to the second
5
.
MHz
to measure
set the
completion
peak.
change
center frequency
the peak
the
column
of
the
of
the
center
of
T
the
sweep
fundamental
frequency
able
2-4
second
est Result"
to
.
.
.
harmonic
the
to
.
same
signal
the
Performance Tests 2-13
Page 38
vi.
Press
vii.
Record the
column).
4
PEAK
5
SEARCH
delta marker
.
reading in
the performance
test record
(\Test
Result"
e.
On the
frequency
f.
On the
level.
i.
Press
ii.
Press
iii.
Press
iv
. Press
v
. Press
vi.
Press
vii.
Record the
column).
6.
|Non-Harmonic
a.
On
the
center
frequencies
4396B,
spectrum analyzer
4396B,
frequency
press
1.8 GHz.
4
CENTER
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK
SEARCH
4
CENTER
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK
SEARCH
delta marker
Spurious
press
.
4
Center
FREQUENCY
5
to make
5
FREQUENCY
5
to make
5
4
Center
500
MHz
T
able
Center
5
5
5
,
4
1
, perform
5
,
a sweep
,
4
NORMAL
5
,
a sweep
.
reading
T
est|
5
5
,
4
5
listed
2-5. Non-Harmonic
4396B
Frequency
5
,
4
,
4
.
8
the following
5
5
4
,
4
,
1
.
.W
5
5
,
4
1
5
5
4
,
4
,
3
.
.
W
in
5
5
,
,
4
4
0
0
in
the
500
MHz
1800
MHz
,
4
G/n
5
4
8
ait for
.
5
4
6
ait
the
,
4
M/
rst
5
to set
the center
steps
5
,
4
.
GHz
the
completion
5
,
4
.
GHz
for
the
completion
performance
5
to
set
column of
Non-Harmonic Spurious
the center
Table
Spurious T
Frequency
to
measure
of
of
test
2-5.
est
478.58
521.42
1558.58
258.58
1778.58
1821.42
2058.58
3858.58
frequency to
record
Settings
the
second
the
sweep
the
sweep
(\T
frequency
T
able
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
.
.
est
to
2-5
the third
harmonic
Result"
the
rst
lists
test
test
b.
On
the
spectrum
spurious
i.
ii. Press
iii. Press
iv. Press
v. Press
vi. Press
vii. Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record (\Test Result"
viii. Press
ix. Press
2-14 Performance Tests
level of
Press
4
CENTER
value as
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK SEARCH
fundamental signal and to place the delta maker reference at the peak.
4
CENTER FREQUENCY
frequency to the rst non-harmonics spurious frequency listed in the second column
of T
able 2-5.
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK SEARCH
column).
4
CENTER FREQUENCY
frequency to the next non-harmonic spurious frequency.
4
SINGLE
analyzer
the
the 4396B center frequency
5
to make
5
to make a sweep
5
to make a sweep.Wait for the completion of the sweep.
,
perform
rst
test
FREQUENCY
a sweep
5,4
NORMAL
5
to move the marker to the peak of the non-harmonic spurious.
the
following
frequency
5
5
,
4
,
5
5,4
5,4
5,4
4
5,455,425,415,4.5,445,425,4
500
5
5
4
,
4
,
0
.Wait for the completion of the sweep
7
.W
4
0
.
5
to move the marker to the peak of the
1
5,4
5,4
8
ait for the completion of the sweep
MHz.
MHz
5,4
.
5
to set
5,4
5
steps
5,4
8
to
measure
the
center
5
to change the center
MHz
5
to change the center
MHz
the
non-harmonic
frequency
.
.
to
the
same
Page 39
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv
. Press
xv
. Record
Press
4
PEAK
Record the
column).
Press
4
CENTER
frequency
Press
4
SINGLE
4
PEAK
the delta
column).
5
SEARCH
delta marker
to the
5
SEARCH
.
FREQUENCY
next non-harmonic
to make
5
.
marker reading
reading in
5
5
,
4
1
a sweep
,
4
.W
the performance
5
5
5
,
5
4
5
ait for
in the
5
,
4
,
4
8
.
spurious frequency
the completion
performance
test record
5
,
5
4
,
4
5
8
5
,
4
to change
MHz
.
of the
test
record
(\Test
sweep.
(\T
est
Result"
the center
Result"
c.
On the
center
d.
On the
spurious
xvii.
xviii.
xxii.
xxiii. Record the delta marker reading in the performance
4396B,
frequency 1.8
spectrum analyzer
level of
i.
Press
ii.
Press
iii.
Press
iv
.
Press
v
.
Press
vi.
Press
vii.
Record
column).
viii.
Press
ix.
Press
x.
Press
xi.
Record
column).
xii.
Press
xiii.
Press
xiv
.
Press
xv.
Record
column).
xvi.
Press
Press
Press
xix.
Record
column).
xx.
Press
xxi.
Press
Press
column).
press
the test
4
CENTER
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
SINGLE
PEAK
SEARCH
CENTER
5
SINGLE
PEAK
SEARCH
the
delta
CENTER
5
SINGLE
PEAK
SEARCH
the
delta
CENTER
5
SINGLE
PEAK
SEARCH
the
delta
CENTER FREQUENCY
5
SINGLE
PEAK SEARCH
the
delta
CENTER
5
SINGLE
PEAK SEARCH
5
5
,
4
Center
GHz in
FREQUENCY
to make
FREQUENCY
to
FREQUENCY
to
FREQUENCY
to
to
FREQUENCY
to
4
1
the
,
perform
frequency
5
a sweep
5
,
4
NORMAL
5
make
a sweep
5
.
marker
5
make a
marker reading
make
marker
make
marker
make
sweep.
5
.
5
a
sweep
5
.
5
a
sweep
5
.
5
a
sweep
5
.
5
,
4
,
4
.
8
rst
the
1.8
5
,
4
,
1
5
,
5
,
,
4
2
reading
5
,
,
4
1
5
,
,
4
1
reading
5
,
,
4
2
reading
5
,
,
4
3
5
,
4
G/n
column
following
GHz.
5
5
4
,
4
.
8
.
W
ait
5
.
4
1
5
,
4
4
8
5
.
W
ait
in
5
,
4
4
7
7
W
ait
in
5
,
4
4
8
2
.
W
ait
in
5
,
4
4
0
5
.
W
ait
in
5
,
4
4
5
8
.W
ait for
5
to set
of
T
able
steps
5
,
4
.
G/n
for
the
5
5
5
,
the
5
,
the
5
,
the
5
,
the
5
,
,
,
4
4
5
.
for
the
performance test
5
5
,
,
4
4
8
.
for
the
performance
5
5
,
,
4
4
1
.
for
the
performance
5
5
,
,
4
4
8
.
for
the
performance
5
5
,
,
4
4
.
8
the completion
the center
2-5
.
to
measure
completion
5
4
8
completion
5
4
5
completion
5
4
4
completion
5
4
5
completion
5
4
5
5
,
4
MHz
5
,
,
4
4
8
MHz
test
5
,
,
4
4
2
MHz
test
5
,
,
4
4
8
MHz
test
5
,
,
4
4
MHz
8
test record (\T
frequency to
the
of
the
.
of
the
record (\T
5
.
of
the
record
5
.
of
the
record
5
.
of
the
record
5
.
of the
the second
non-harmonic
sweep
.
sweep
.
est Result"
sweep
.
(\T
est
Result"
sweep
.
(\T
est
Result"
sweep.
(\T
est
Result"
sweep.
est Result"
Performance Tests 2-15
Page 40
6. RECEIVER
Description
test
measures the
at
IF
BW
10
Hz
and
(mean)
In
measured
the
The
are
the
for the
receiver noise
kHz.
IF
IF
when
this
test,
data
with the
receiver
converted
used
signal
IF BW
The
BW
40
BW
40
the
inputs
the
noise
values
are converted
marker statistics
noise level
(
0
20 dB)
path
10 Hz.
level at
measurement using
kHz
is
dierent
kHz
is
tested.
Specication
NOISE LEVEL
4396B receiver
40 kHz.
level
This measures
are
terminated.
(trace mean
to log
noise levels
magnitude format
function.
at IF
to the
within the
A
digital
10 Hz
can
from
BW 10
IF BW
Hz is
value of
analyzer.
lter
technique
be
calculated
1
that for
TEST (NA)
the noise
value) is
measured
the
IF
BW
The signal
is
mathematically
kHz
reduces
IF
BW
(noise oor)
level using
measured in
[dBm]. This
using
IF
10
Hz.
The
path
for
used
at
both
the
measurement
3
kHz.
Therefore
in the
network analyzer
the
marker
linear format
is
done
BW
1
kHz.
noise
sources
IF
BW
1
kHz
IF
BW
settings
from
the
time
,
the
receiver
[Unit].
The
is
noise
.
The
statistics
to
avoid
measured
depend
the
same
.
Therefore
level
signal
noise
function
Then
skewing
mainly
as
at
IF
path
level
mode
the
values
on
that
,
the
BW
for
at
1
Noise
level
Noise
T
est
50
Frequency
100
k
freq.
<
10
MHz
100
k
freq.
<
10
MHz
10
MHz
freq.
10
MHz
freq.
1
:
Frequency
2
:
f
is
range
measurement
at
IFBW
frequency
Equipment
termination, type-N(m)
Input
R
A,
B
R
A,
B
40
kHz
is
from
1
MHz
(GHz).
(three required)
<
<
::
@IFB
[
0
[
0
to
:
<
100
125
1.8
:
<
:
Procedure
1. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-6.
W=10
0
85
0
110
+
+
GHz.
:
:
:
:
Level
dBm
dBm
3
f
]
3
f
]
:
:
:
Hz
dBm
dBm
:
:
Noise
Level
dBm
dBm
3
f
3
f
]
]
kHz
dBm
dBm
1
2
2
of 85032B
@IFB
W=40
<
0
50
<
0
2
2
:
:
:
:
909C
<
<
Opt 012
75
[
0
65
+
[
0
90
+
or part
2-16 Performance Tests
Page 41
Figure 2-6.
Receiver Noise
Level T
est
Setup
2.
3.
Press
the
controls as
Press
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
5
4
,
Meas
follows:
Control
Input:
F
ormat:
Scale/Division: 1
Input:
F
ormat:
Scale/Division:
Input:
F
ormat:
Scale/Division:
RF OUT
Frequency Span: 0 Hz
Number of P
Statistics: ON
4
Bw/Avg
Settings
R
LINEAR
A
LINEAR
B
LINEAR
Power: OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
IF BW,415,4
N
TYPE
mU
1
mU
1mU
oints: 801
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NETWORK
,
5
to set the 4396B IF BW to 1 kHz.
k/m
ANALYZER
K
ey
4
5
Meas
4
F
o
rmat
4
Scale
4
5
Meas
4
F
o
rmat
4
Scale
4
5
Meas
4
F
o
rmat
4
Scale
4
Source
changes to
4
5
Span
4
Sweep
4
Utility
changes to
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Preset
Strokes
N
N
N
N
N
R
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
LIN
5
,
5
,
Ref
N
N
N
N
N
A
,
N
NN
LIN
5
,
5
,
Ref
N
N
NN
N
B
,
N
N
LIN
5
,
5
,
Ref
N
N
N
RF OUT ON off
5
,
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ZERO SPAN
,
NNNNNNNNNNN
NUMBER of POINTS
5
,
NNNNN
5
,
STATISTICS on OFF
N
MAG
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAG
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
MAG
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RF OUT on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STATISTICS ON off
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
to
initialize
N
N
5
,
,
4
1
N
N
5
,
,
4
1
N
N
5
,
4
,
1
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
(Then the softkey label
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the
4396B
5
4
k/m
5
4
k/m
5
4
k/m
.)
5,4
5,4
5,4
4
8
(Then the softkey label
NNNNNNNNN
1
0
.)
x1
5
.
Then
set
4. Press
4
5,415,405,405,4
Center
frequency 100 kHz listed in Table 2-6. Table 2-6 lists test frequencies for the receiver noise
level test at IF BW 10 Hz.
5
to set the 4396B center frequency to the rst center
k/m
Performance Tests 2-17
Page 42
5.
P
erform
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
the
following
Press
Press
Record
column). The
right-hand
Press
Press
Record the
column).
Press
Press
Record
column).
4
Meas
4
T
rigger
4
Meas
4
T
rigger
4
Meas
4
T
rigger
the
the
5
,
4396B
corner
5
,
4396B
5
,
4396B
N
N
N
N
N
R
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
trace
N
N
N
N
N
A
NN
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
B
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
to
N
to
N
to
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
NN
N
steps
set
NN
N
N
N
N
N
trace
mean
of the
set
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
trace
set
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
trace
T
able 2-6.
the
N
N
N
N
N
to
mean
the
N
N
N
N
N
to
mean
the
N
N
N
N
N
to
mean
to
measure the
4396B
make
display.
4396B
make
4396B
make
value
input
a
value
is
to
a
value
input
a
value
Receiver Noise
4396B
Center Frequency
100
kHz
1
MHz
10
MHz
100
MHz
500
MHz
1.0
GHz
1.4
GHz
1.8
GHz
receiver noise
to R
input.
sweep.
displayed
sweep
sweep
[Unit]
A
input.
[Unit]
[Unit]
to
.
.
Wait
in
W
ait
in
B
input.
W
ait
in
as
for
the
a
for
the
for
the
the
calculation
marker
the
calculation
the
calculation
T
est
Settings
level.
completion
completion
completion
sheet
statistic
sheet
sheet
of
the
(\Trace
(mean)
of
the
(\Trace
of
the
(\Trace
sweep
Mean
in
the
sweep
Mean
sweep
Mean
.
[Unit]"
upper
.
[Unit]"
.
[Unit]"
6.
Change
each
7.
Press
8.
Press
MHz
BW
9. Repeat step 5 to measure the receiver noise level.
the
setting.
4
Bw/Avg
4
Center
listed
40
kHz.
4396B
N
5
,
5
,
4
1
in
T
able
N
IF
5
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
4
M/
center
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
BW
,
5
2-7
frequency
5
,
4
4
0
4
to
set
.
T
able
T
able
in accordance
5
5
,
the
to
4
k/m
4396B
2-7
lists
2-7. Receiver
Center Frequency
set
the
center
test
frequencies
4396B
4396B
frequency
Noise
10 MHz
100 MHz
500 MHz
1.0 GHz
1.4 GHz
1.8 GHz
with T
IF
T
est
1MHz
able
BW
to
to
for
the
Settings
2-6
40
the
rst
receiver
,
and
kHz.
2
repeat
center
noise
step
5
frequency
level test
for
1
at IF
2-18 Performance Tests
Page 43
10. Change
each setting.
the 4396B
center frequency
in accordance
with T
able
2-6
,
and
repeat
step
5
for
11. Convert
calculation sheet.
the unit
of the
test
Record the
results
from
test results
[Unit]
[dBm]
to
in
[dBm]
the
performance
using
the
equation
test
record.
given
in
the
Performance Tests 2-19
Page 44
7. INPUT
Description
test
measures the
R,
A,
and
B
inputs
Specication
CROSSTALK
crosstalk (signal
when
RF OUT
TEST (NA)
leakage interference)
signal is
supplied to
between two
one input
and
the
inputs of
other
the 4396B
is
terminated.
Input
T
est
N(m)-N(m)
50
Procedure
1.
2.
crosstalk
@
300
A
to/from
R
to
A,
B
Equipment
termination,
Press
4
Meas
the controls
Control Settings
Dual
Start
|R
into
a.
Connect
kHz
B
A,
B
:
:
:
to
R
:
:
cable
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
5
,
as
follows:
Channel: ON
Frequency:
A
Crosstalk
the
test
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
61
cm
:
type-N(m)
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE
and
equipment
:
:
::
::
:
:
N
N
N
N
N
300
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
(two
N
NN
NN
R
:
:
N
,
kHz
into B
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
required)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NETWORK
as shown
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
4
5
,
Displa
y
changes
5
,
Sta
rt
in Figure
4
3
4
Crosstalk|
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DUAL
to
5
,
4
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
DUAL
5
,
0
2-7.
::
::
:
:
:
:
::
4
Preset
N
N
N
N
N
CHAN
N
NN
N
N
4
0
N
N
5
::
:
:
:
N
N
N
N
,
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
CHAN
4
k/m
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
:
:
:
:
:
N
N
on
N
N
:
:
:
to
N
5
:
:
N
N
N
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
909C
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
Opt
initialize
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFF
(Then
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ON off
N
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
<
0
100
dB
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
0
120
dB
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
0
80
dB
or
part of
012
or
the
4396B
the
N
N
N
.)
softkey
.
Then
of
85032B
label
11851B
set
2-20 Performance Tests
Page 45
b.
Set
the
4396B
controls as
Figure 2-7.
follows:
Input Crosstalk
Test
Setup
1
Control
A
ctive
Input:
Reference
A
ctive
Input:
Reference
Source
IF
c.
Press
4
Trigger
d.
Press
4
Ch
1
trace (A/R).
e. Record the marker reading in the performance test record (\T
into A crosstalk).
f.
Press
4
Ch
2
trace (B/R).
g. Record the marker reading in the performance test record (\T
into B crosstalk).
BW:
5
5
,
5,4
4
Settings
Channel:
A/R
V
Channel:
B/R
V
P
ower:
10
Hz
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
,
5
Sea
rch
5
Sea
rch
alue:
alue:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
,
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX
,
K
ey
Strokes
CH
1
0
100
dB
CH
2
0
100
dB
+20
dBm
N
N
to
make
a
sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
move
the
to move the channel 2 marker to the
5
4
Ch
1
4
5
,
Meas
4
Scale
Ref
5
4
Ch
2
4
5
,
Meas
4
Scale Ref
4
5
Source
4
Bw/Avg
.
W
ait
channel
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A/R
NN
N
N
N
REFERENCE
5
,
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
B/R
N
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
5
,
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
POWER
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF
5
,
for
1
marker to
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
BW
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
NN
5
4
,
4
2
0
N
5
,
4
,
4
0
1
completion
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
VALUE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
5
,
4
x1
5
,
4
x1
maximum
est Result" column for R
maximum point on the
est Result" column for R
,
4
-
5
4
-
the
4
1
5
,
4
1
sweep
point
,
,
,
N
N
N
N
N
NN
,
5
of
5
,
4
4
0
0
5
5
,
4
4
0
0
.
on
,
,
the
5
4
x1
5
4
x1
3.
|A into R Crosstalk and A into B Crosstalk|
a. Press
b. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-8 .
4
Source
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
5
,
POWER,4-5,455,4x15
to set the source power to05dBm.
Performance Tests 2-21
Page 46
c.
Change
the
4396B
Figure 2-8.
controls as
Input Crosstalk
follows:
Test
Setup
2
d.
e.
Press
Set
Control
A
ctive
Input:
A
ctive
Input:
IF
4
T
rigger
the
4396B
Control
A
ctive
Data
Data Math:
Reference V
Input:
BW:
5
!
Settings
Channel:
A
Channel:
A
1
kHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
,
controls
Settings
Channel:
Memory
R
CH
CH
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
to
as
CH
DATA0MEM
alue:0100 dB
Active Channel: CH 2
Data!Memory
Data Math: DATA0MEM
Reference Value:0100 dB
1
2
make
follows:
1
a
sweep
K
ey
Strokes
5
4
Ch
1
N
N
N
N
N
5
Meas
5
Ch
2
5
Meas
Bw/Avg
.W
ait for
ey
Strokes
5
Ch
1
Displa
y
Display
A
,
N
N
N
N
N
A
,
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF BW
5
,
the completion
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
DATA
5
,
is stored.)
5
,
!
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH [DATA]
4
4
4
4
K
4
4
trace
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
Scale Ref
REFERENCE VALUE
5
,
NNNNN
Meas
5
Ch 2
Display
Display
R
5
,
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
5
,
DATA!MEMORY
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
DATA MATH [DATA]
4
4
4
trace is stored.)
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
Scale Ref
5
,
REFERENCE VALUE,4-5,415,405,405,4x15
N
N
N
N
,
4
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MEMORY
5
,
5
4
k/m
of the
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
(A
beep
NNNNNNNNNNNN
sweep
indicates
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA0MEM
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5,4
5,4
,
4
1
-
NNNNNN
(A beep indicates that the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
DATA0MEM
0
.
5,4
that
5,4
0
x1
the
5
2-22 Performance Tests
Page 47
4.
f.
Press
g.
Press
trace
h.
Record
into
i.
Press
trace
j.
Record
into
|B
a.
Connect
Input:
IF
4
T
4
Ch
(R/Memory).
R
crosstalk).
4
Ch 2
(B/Memory).
B
crosstalk).
into
R
B
BW: 10
rigger
5
1
the
5
the
,
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
4
Sea
rch
marker
4
Search
marker
Hz
N
N
NN
NN
5
,
reading
5
,
reading in
Crosstalk and
the
test
equipment
NN
NN
N
N
MAX
NN
MAX
NN
to
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
make
NN
to
in
N
N
N
to
B into
4
Meas
4
Bw/Avg
a
sweep
.
move
the
channel
the
performance
move
the
channel
the performance
A Crosstalk|
as
shown
in Figure
W
5
ait
,
N
NN
NN
B
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
IF
5
BW
,
for the
1
marker
test
2
marker
test record
2-9
.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
5
,
4
4
1
0
completion of
to
the maximum
record
to
(\T
the
(\T
5
,
4
x1
the sweep
est
Result" column
maximum
est
Result"
.
point on
point
on
column
the
for A
the
for
A
Figure 2-9. Input
b. Change the 4396B controls as follows:
Control Settings Key Strokes
Active Channel: CH 1
Input: B
Data Math: D
ATA
Active Channel: CH 2
Input: B
Data Math: DATA
IF BW: 1 kHz
Crosstalk T
5
4
Ch 1
4
5
,
Meas
5
4
Display
4
5
Ch 2
4
5
,
Meas
4
5
Display
4
Bw/Avg
est Setup 3
NNNN
N
B
NN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH [D
,
NNNN
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
B
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
DATA MATH [D0M]
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
IF BW,415,4
k/m
NN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
0M],
DATA MATH: DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
DATA MATH: DATA
5
Performance Tests 2-23
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Page 48
c.
d.
Press
Set the
4
T
rigger
4396B
N
NN
NN
SINGLE
5
,
controls
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to make
as
a sweep
follows:
.W
ait for
the completion
of the
sweep
.
e.
Press
f.
Press
trace
g.
Record
into
h.
Press
(A/Memory).
Control
A
ctive Channel:
Data
!
Memory
Data
Math: D
Reference
Input:
A
ctive
Data
!
Memory
Data
Math:
Reference
Input:
IF
BW:
5
4
4
(R/Memory).
R
4
,
T
rigger
5
,
4
Ch
Ch
Sea
1
the
marker
crosstalk).
5
,
4
Sea
2
Settings K
CH
1
A
T
A
0
MEM
V
alue:
0
100
dB
R
Channel:
A
10
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
SINGLE
rch
rch
D
A
V
alue:
Hz
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
reading
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
T
N
N
N
N
N
N
A
to
N
N
N
N
CH
0
0
make
N
N
to
N
N
to
2
MEM
100
move
in
move
dB
a
sweep.
the
the
performance test
the
ey
Strokes
5
4
Ch
1
4
Displa
y
trace
is stored.)
4
Displa
y
4
Scale Ref
4
5
,
Meas
5
4
Ch
2
4
Displa
y
trace
is
4
Displa
y
4
Scale
Ref
4
5
,
Meas
4
Bw/Avg
Wait
channel
channel
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
DATA
5
,
NN
NN
N
REFERENCE VALUE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
R
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
DATA
5
,
stored.)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
A
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF
5
,
for
1
marker
2
marker
N
!
MEMORY
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
!
MEMORY
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
BW
,
4
1
completion
to
record
to
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
[DATA]
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
the
(\T
the
NN
N
(A
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
(A beep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
VALUE
5
,
4
x1
0
of
the
maximum
est
maximum
beep
indicates
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
-
indicates that
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
DATA
,
NN
NN
NN
5
,
,
4
-
5
sweep
Result"
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
0
5
4
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
5
4
1
point
column
point
N
N
N
MEM
,
N
N
NN
MEM
,
.
that
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
5
4
4
0
x1
the
NN
NN
N
N
N
5
5
,
4
4
x1
0
on
the
for
B
i.
Record
into
the
A
crosstalk).
marker
reading
in the
performance test
record
(\T
est
result"
column
for
B
2-24 Performance Tests
Page 49
8. INPUT
Description
test
uses a
4396B
accurately
The
return
However
this
Specication
R,
4396B
loss
test.
A,
and
.
has
of the
,
it cannot
IMPEDANCE
network analyzer
B
inputs
. One-port
no
capability
B(or
measure the
for
A) input
TEST (NA)
and a
T/R test
full calibration
making an
using A/R
R input's
A/B measurement.
(or
return loss
set to
is performed
B/R)
measurement
.
measure the
The 4396B
Therefore
,
return losses
to measured
can measure
capability
a
network
of
the
of
the
analyzer
the
return
4396B
is
loss
the
.
used
in
Return
T
est
Network
T/R
50
APC
N(m)-N(m)
Procedure
1.
loss
@frequency
Equipment
T
est
Set
Type-N
7-N(f)
1:
Connect
the
test
Analyzer
:
:
:
::
Calibration
adapter
cable
,
This
calibration
SHORT(f),
the
test
port
cable
500
kHz
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
Kit
:
:
:
:
:
61
cm
(four
kit
LO
AD(f)
equipment
.
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
includes
in the
::
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
required)
several
calibration
as
shown
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
terminations
kit
in
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
85032B
Figure
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
>
20
dB
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
8753A/B/C
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
85044A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
85032B
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11524A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
and
adapters
.
2-10
.
.Don't
This
test
requires
connect anything
or
or
the
part
of
part
of
OPEN(f),
to
the
end
1
85032B
11851B
of
Performance Tests 2-25
Page 50
Figure
2-10. Impedance
T
est
Setup
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
2.
Press
4
Meas
3.
On
the
to
measure
a.
Press
b.
Press
c.
Press
d.
Press
e.
Press
initiate
f. Connect a type N(f) open to the end of the test port cable
g.
Press
h. Remove the open from the test port cable and connect a type
cable.
i. Press
j. Remove the short from the test port cable and connect a type N(f) 50 load to the test
port
k.
Press
l.
Press
m. Remove the type N(f) 50 load from the test port cable
4. Connect the test port cable to the 4396B R input.
ANALYZER
5
,
network
4
4
4
4
4
NNNNNNNNN
(S11):OPENS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SHORTS
cable.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LOAD
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:1-PORT CAL
analyzer
the
return
5
to
Preset
MENU
ST
STOP
CAL
N
NN
POWER
5
,
5
,
ART
5
,
4
1
NN
NN
NN
CAL KIT
5
,
a
calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
.Wait until a beep sounds.
N
TYPE
,
loss
initialize
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
0
5
5
5
,
,
4
4
.
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SHORT (M)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NETWORK
,
perform
.
the
5
4
,
-
5
,
4
0
5
,
4
8
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
[7mm]
NNNNNNNNN
OPEN (M)
NNNNNNN
the
following
network
5
5
4
,
4
.
1
x1
5
.
4
k/m
5
.
G/n
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.W
to complete the calibration sequence.
N
N 50
.W
ait until a beep sounds
ait until a beep sounds
N
N
N
ANALYZER
analyzer
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
RETURN
,
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Preset
steps
to
.
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
CALIBRATION MENU
,
5
to
initialize
set
the
network
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
.
. Then press
. Then press
the
4396B
analyzer
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
S11 1-PORT
,
N(f) short to the test port
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:SHORTS
N
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:OPENS
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
controls
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
.
N
to
.
2-26 Performance Tests
Page 51
5.
On
the
6.
On
to
7.
Record the
test
8.
Remove
9.
On the
the
10.
On
to
11.
Record
test
12.
Remove
13.
On
the
14.
On
to
the network
completion
the
network
the maximum
network
record
completion
the
the
record
the
completion
the
the
(\T
est
the
test
network analyzer
network
maximum
the
network
(\T
est
the
test
network
network
maximum
analyzer,
of
the
analyzer
point on
analyzer's
Result"
port
of
the
analyzer
point
analyzer's
Result"
port
analyzer
of
the
analyzer
point
press
sweep
,
press
the trace
column).
cable
,
press
sweep.
,
press
on
the
column).
cable
,
press
sweep
,
press
on
the
.
from
trace
from
.
trace
4
MENU
4
MKR
.
marker
the
4
MENU
4
MKR
.
marker
the
4
MENU
4
MKR
.
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
TRIGGER
5
,
FCTN
reading
4396B
N
NN
TRIGGER MENU
5
,
F
CTN
reading
4396B
N
N
TRIGGER
5
,
FCTN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MKR
5
,
R
input
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
MKR
5
,
A
input
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MKR
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MENU
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
SEARCH
(with
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
SEARCH
(with
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
MENU
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SEARCH
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
and
NN
NN
N
N
N
and
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
NN
NN
NN
,
NN
NN
NN
N
an
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
an
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
NN
NN
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
SINGLE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
[OFF]
opposite
connect
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
[OFF]
opposite
connect
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[OFF]
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
to make
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
,
sign)
it
to
N
N
to
make a
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
MAX
,
sign)
it
to
N
N
to
make
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
,
N
N
NN
N
N
N
the
the
N
to
in
to
in
to
move
the
move
the
move
a sweep
the
performance
A
input.
sweep
the
performance
B
input.
a
sweep
the
.W
ait for
marker
.
W
ait
marker
.
W
ait
marker
for
for
15.
Record
test
record
the
network
(\T
est
Result"
analyzer's
column).
marker
reading
(with an
opposite sign)
in
the
performance
Performance Tests 2-27
Page 52
9. ABSOLUTE
Description
test
measures a
function
compares
amplitude
In
through
Specication
this
in
the
network
the
4396B
measurement
test, the
a
4396B RF
two-way power
AMPLITUDE A
test signal
analyzer
reading
is
amplitude using
mode
with
the
veried
OUT signal
splitter and
over
and using
reading of
is used
applied to
CCURACY
the 4396B
a power
the power
the
entire frequency
as
the
an 4396B
test
TEST (NA)
absolute amplitude
meter and
meter.
range.
signal.
input
apower
The accuracy
The
RF
and
the
OUT
power
measurement
sensor
.
Then
of
the
signal
is
sensor
divided
it
absolute
input.
Absolute
@
T
est
Equipment
P
ower
Power
Two-way P
N(m)-N(m) cable
N(m)-N(m) adapter
Procedure
1.
Connect
sensor
2.
Connect
0
20
Meter
Sensor
amplitude
dBm
ower
the
.
the
input,
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
Splitter
,
61
power
test
accuracy
23
6
5
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
sensor
equipment
(R,
A,
B)
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
<
6
1.5 dB
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
436A Opt.
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
11500B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
to
the
as
power
shown
in
meter
Figure
.
Calibrate
2-11
the
power
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
meter
022,
437B
,
or
438A
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
8482A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11667A
or
of
11851B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
1250-1475
for
the
power
2-28 Performance Tests
Page 53
Figure
2-11. Absolute
Amplitude
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
Hz
Points:
Span:
5,4
5,4
0
N
TYPE
14
3.
Press
4
Meas
the
controls
4.
Press
4
Meas
5. P
erform the following steps to test the absolute amplitude accuracy at the R input.
a. Press
frequency 100 kHz listed in
ANALYZER
5
,
as
follows:
Control
Source
IF
Number of
Frequency
Statistics:
4
Settings
P
ower:
BW:
100
N
NNNN
R
to set the 4396B to the R
5
,
5,4
Center
ON
1
N
N
0
0
N
N
N
N
11
Hz
5,4
N
N
N
N
dBm
k/m
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
NETWORK
,
5
Table 2-8. T
N
K
4
Source
4
Bw/Avg
4
Sw
4
Span
4
Utilit
changes to
to set the 4396B
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
ey
Strokes
5
5
eep
5
,
5
,
y
input.
able 2-8 lists test frequencies
N
,
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
POWER
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
NUMBER
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
ZERO
SPAN
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
STATISTICS
NNNNN
STATISTICS ON off
center frequency to the rst test
5
Preset
5
4
-
N
,
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
of
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
to
5
,
4
1
5
,
4
1
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
POINTS
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
on
4
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
NN
BW
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
initialize
5
,
4
4
5
,
4
0
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the
5
,
4
x1
5
5
,
4
x1
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
,
4
,
4
1
1
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
(Then
.)
.
4396B
5
,
4
x1
the
softkey label
.
Then
set
Performance Tests 2-29
Page 54
b.
d.
6.
Remove
7.
Press
Press
c.
Record the
(\4396B
mean
the
Change
and
4
Meas
T
rigger
,
4
N
N
SINGLE
5
trace
Reading" column
value is
display
the
5-c
for
the
5
.
power
N
N
NN
N
A
,
displayed
4396B
each
to
T
able 2-8.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
mean
Absolute Amplitude
N
N
N
N
to
make
value
and
as
a
center
frequency in
center frequency
splitter from
set
the
4396B
4396B
Center Frequency
a
sweep
.
and
the
power
\P
ower
Meter
marker
statistic
accordance
.
the R
input, and
to
the
A
input.
W
ait for
100
1.79
meter
A
ccuracy
100
kHz
1
MHz
10
MHz
50
MHz
MHz
1
GHz
GHz
1.8
GHz
the completion
reading
Reading"
(mean)
in
with
connect it
T
est
in
column,
the
upper
T
able
directly
Settings
of the
the
calculation
respectively).
right-hand
2-8
,
and
repeat
to
the
sweep
A
input.
.
sheet
The
corner
steps
trace
of
5-b
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Repeat
Remove
Press
4
Meas
Repeat
Calculate
results
in
step 5
to
the power
N
N
N
N
N
B
5
,
5
to
the
test
the
performance
test
to
test
the
splitter
set
the
the
results
absolute
from
4396B
absolute
using
the
test
record.
amplitude
the
A
to
the
amplitude
equation
input,
B
input.
accuracy
and
connect
accuracy
given
in
at
the
at
the
the
calculation
4396B
it
directly
B
input.
A
input.
to
sheet.
the
B
input.
Record
the
test
2-30 Performance Tests
Page 55
10. MA
(NA)
Description
GNITUDE RA
TIO/PHASE D
YNAMIC A
CCURACY
TEST
Dynamic
components
T
o measure
4396B
(full
measures
The
measured
values
The
individual
In this
a VSWR
caused by
performance test
Specication
Magnitude
accuracy is
of a
the
R input
scale input
the magnitude
signal
phase
amplitude
magnitude
.
dynamic
attenuator
test,
a
1.015
mismatch error
(relative
to
(reference
ratio/phase
Input
full
a measure
signal
dynamic
level)
to
at
ratio
accuracy
segments
attenuator
are
used.
record
Level
scale input
0
dB
0
10
dB
0
20
dB
0
30
dB
0
40
dB
0
50
dB
0
60
dB
0
70
dB
0
80
dB
0
90 dB
0
100
dB
as
that
accuracy
input).
0
105
ratio
the
test
values
Using
.
When
are
valid.
dynamic
level)
of how
signal
,
At
dBm
from
input
are
is
measured
is
small
with
these
they
1
well
varies
this
test
the
same
to
one
+30
dB
is
varied
then
when
its
VSWR
attenuators
are
accuracy
a
receiver
in
amplitude
applies
time
of
the
to
0
70
by
compared
at
3
MHz
compared
1.02
used,
the
(A/R,
Magnitude
A
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
measures
over
a
xed
level
,
it
applies
4396B
's
A
dB
and
inserting
to
the
(where
to
and
two
reduces
measurement
B/R)
Ratio
Dynamic
6
0.3
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
6
0.1
6
0.3 dB
6
1.0
2
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
ccuracy
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
the
a
specied
signal
a
signal
or
B
the
phase
known
inserted
the
phase
the
test
6
dB
the
measurement
magnitude
dynamic
of
0
35
that
varies
inputs
(test
of
the
attenuation
attenuation's
error
contribution
limits).
xed
attenuators
uncertainties
Phase
and
phase
range
dBm
to
from
input).
signals
uncertainties
Dynamic
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
.
values
calibrated
listed
6
3
deg
6
0.6
deg
6
0.3
deg
6
0.3 deg
6
0.3
deg
6
0.3
deg
6
0.3 deg
6
0.3
deg
6
0.7
deg
6
2 deg
6
7
deg
It then
with
A
ccuracy
the
0
.
in
.
5
The
by
the
dBm
the
1
1
: full scale input level =
2
: @23
C, IFBW = 10 Hz, R input =
6
5
0
5dBm
0
35 dBm, Reference power level=
0
35 dBm
Performance Tests 2-31
Page 56
T
est
Equipment
Two-way
Step
Attenuator
Attenuator
6
dB Fixed
6
dB Fixed
N(m)-N(m)
N(m)-N(m)
1:
2:
Procedure
1.
2.
Record
V
alue"
Press
the
the
column).
4
Meas
controls
Control
Dual Channel:
Marker:
Start
Stop
IF
Number
Calibration
Power
Splitter
1
,
10 dB
2
driver
Attenuation (two
Attenuation, VSWR
cable,
adapter
Calibration values
Required
5
BW:
61 cm
when using
step attenuator
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
,
as
follows:
Settings
DISCRETE
Frequency:
Frequency:
10
Hz
of
:
Step,
:
::
::
::
(three required)
:
::
::
::
for
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE
ON
3
50
P
oints:
Kit:
Type
::
::
::
::
::
VSWR
::
::
::
::
:
:
required)
1.015
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
attenuation
a programmable
50 MHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
0
N,
N
NETWORK
50
N
N
N
2
N
N
N
MHz
MHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
1.02
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
(two required)
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
settings
calibration values
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
of
step attenuator
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
4
5
,
Displa
y
changes to
4
5
,
Mark
er
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
MKR
to
4
Start
4
Stop
4
Bw/Avg
4
Sw
4
Cal
[DISCRETE]
5
,
4
3
5
5
,
4
5
5
,
N
NUMBER of
5
,
eep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
CAL
5
,
10
dB
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
DUAL
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MKR
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
,
4
0
N
N
N
N
IF
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
KIT
N
N
M/
N
N
N
N
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
to
70
dB
8496G.
in
the
N
N
N
N
,
NN
NN
NN
N
N
NN
NN
DUAL CHAN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
N
N
N
N
NN
BW
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
Preset
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
CHAN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
[CONT]
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
4
M/
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[7mm]
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
NN
NN
POINTS
N
N
NN
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
8496A/G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
at
50
MHz
calculation
to
initialize
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
ON
(Then
5
,
4
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
OFF
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
x1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
50
N
N
N
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
on
N
N
.)
N
NN
:
:
:
::
::
:
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
8491A
:
:
11500B
::
::
::
are
required.
the
N
N
N
(Then the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
off
.)
the
softkey
N
5
,
4
,
4
2
x1
N
NN
NN
N
N
::
::
::
::
Option 001
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
8491A
Opt
006
or
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
sheet
(\Calibration
4396B
softkey label
label
5
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
&
of
PN
1250-1475
.
Then
changes
:
11667A
and H60
:
11713A
Opt
006
Opt H60
11851B
set
3.
|A/R
2-32 Performance Tests
a.
Connect
Dynamic
the
A
ccuracy
test
T
est
equipment
(Magnitude
as
shown
in
Ratio
Figure
at
2-12
50
.
MHz
and Phase
at 3
MHz)|
Page 57
b.
On
Figure
the
4396B
2-12. A/R
,
set
the controls
Magnitude
as
follows:
Ratio/Phase
Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
1
Control Settings
Source P
A
ctive
Input:
F
ormat:
Average
A
veraging:
ower:
Channel:
A/R
LOG
MA
F
actor:
ON
0
17
dBm
CH
G
5
Active Channel: CH 2
Input: A/R
Format:
Average F
PHASE
actor: 5
Averaging: ON
1
K
ey
Strokes
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
4
Source
4
Ch
4
Meas
POWER
5
,
5
1
N
NN
NN
N
A/R
5
,
N
4
5
,
F
ormat
4
4
Bw/Avg
Bw/Avg
5
,
5
,
changes to
5
4
Ch 2
Meas
NNNNNNNN
5
A/R
,
4
,
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
LOG
N
MAG
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE FACTOR
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE on
NNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
AVERAGE ON off
NNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PHASE
5
4
4
NNNNNN
AVERAGE on OFF
to
,
Fo
rmat
Bw/Avg
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AVERAGE FACTOR
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AVERAGE ON off
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
c. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.
d.
Press
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
5
,
CALIBRATION MENU
Cal
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
RESPONSE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
THRU
to perform the response (THRU)
calibration. Wait for the completion of the sweep. Then press
5
5
5
,
,
4
4
-
1
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
OFF
,
4
7
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
4
x1
N
,
4
5
(Then
5
,
5
4
x1
the
softkey
.)
NNNNNNN
5
5,4
,
4
x1
5
(Then the softkey label changes
.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:RESPONSE
.
label
Performance Tests 2-33
Page 58
e.
Set the
step attenuator
T
able 2-9.
to the
A/R Dynamic
rst setting
30
dB
Accuracy
in
the
second
T
est
column
Settings
of
T
able
2-9
.
1
f.
g.
h.
On
the
setting
P
erform
i.
Press
of
ii.
Press
iii.
Record
dynamic
the
iv
.
Press
v
.
Record
the
the
Change
second
4396B
in
the
4
the
4
rst
4
test
rst
the
and
,
the
third
following
T
rigger
sweep
Ma
rk
er
the
accuracy
column
5
to
+
the
result
column
step
third
Input Level
press
4
Source
columns
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NUMBER
5
,
.
5
5
,
4
to move
*
channel
.
of
move
the
channel
column
of
attenuator
columns
4396B
steps
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
1
Use
T
able
2
T
able
0
dB
0
10
dB
0
20
dB
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
POWER
5
,
of
T
to
measure
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OF
GROUPS
the channel
marker
the
4396B
2-9
channel
marker
of
the
2-9
setting
of
T
able
Step Attenuator 4396B
Source P
30
dB
20
dB
10
dB
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
5
,
4
1
able
2-9
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
,
reading in
reading
,
4
.
the
5
5
5
to
,
4
3
5
,
4
x1
1
4
dynamic
marker
the
set
x1
5
to
make
calculation
the
accuracy
to
50
column corresponding
a
.
2
marker
reading
phase
to
3
MHz.
directly
in
measurement
the performance
corresponding
.
and
2-9
4396B
,
and
power
perform
setting
step
+13
+3
0
source
.
sweep
MHz.
sheet
in
3-g
for each
ower
dBm
dBm
7
dBm
power
.
W
ait
for
the
to
test record.
to
accordance
setting.
to
the rst
for
the
magnitude
the
input
the input
with the
completion
ratio
level
in
Use
level in
i.
Change
the
cable
connection
as
shown in
Figure
2-13
.
2-34 Performance Tests
Page 59
Figure
j.
On
the
4396B
2-13. A/R
,
set
the controls
Magnitude
as
follows:
Ratio/Phase
Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
2
k.
Set
the
l.
Press
4
Cal
calibration. W
Control Settings
Source P
A
ctive
A
verage
A
ctive
A
verage
5
ower:
0
Channel:
F
actor:
Channel:
F
actor:
attenuator
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATION MENU
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ait for the completion of the sweep
17
CH
10
CH
10
to
dBm
1
2
0
dB
.
NNNNN
,
K
ey
4
Source
4
Ch
4
Bw/Avg
4
Ch
4
Bw/Avg
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RESPONSE
Strokes
5
,
5
1
5
,
5
2
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNN
THRU
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
POWER
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE FACTOR
to perform the response (THRU)
. Then press
m. Set the step attenuator to the rst setting 10 dB in the
5
5
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
-
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
1
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
FACTOR
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
4
N
N
N
7
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NNNNNNNNN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
4
x1
N
5
,
4
1
N
5
,
4
1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:RESPONSE
second column of T
,
4
0
,
4
0
5
5
,
4
x1
5
,
5
4
x1
NNNNNNN
able 2-10.
.
Performance Tests 2-35
Page 60
T
able 2-10.
A/R Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Settings
2
n.
o.
P
erform
i.
Press
completion
ii.
Press
iii.
Record
dynamic
the
iv
.
Press
v
.
Record
the
the
Change
and
perform
the
4
4
rst
4
test
rst
the
following
Trigger
of
5
Ma
rk
er
the
channel
accuracy
column
5
to
+
the
channel
result
column
step
steps
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NUMBER OF
5
,
the
sweep
5
to
,
4
*
.
of
T
move
the
column
of
T
attenuator
3-n
for
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
move
1
marker
Use
able
channel
2
marker
of
able
each
4396B
Input Level
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
measure
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GROUPS
.
the
channel
reading
the
4396B
2-10
.
2
reading
the
phase
2-10
.
setting
setting.
40
dB
50
dB
60 dB
70
dB
80 dB
90
dB
100
dB
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
5
,
4
1
reading
marker
measurement
in
accordance
Step Attenuator
10
20 dB
30
40 dB
50
60 dB
70
dynamic
,
5
,
4
0
1
marker to
in
the
column
to
3
directly
accuracy
5
to
4
x1
make
50 MHz.
calculation
corresponding
MHz.
in
the
corresponding
with
the
dB
dB
dB
dB
.
a
sweep
sheet
for the
performance
second
column
.
W
to
test
to
ait
for
magnitude
the
input
record.
the
input
of
T
the
ratio
level in
Use
level
able 2-10
in
,
4.
|B/R
a.
Connect
Dynamic
the
A
ccuracy
test
equipment
T
est
(Magnitude
as
shown
in
Ratio
Figure
at
2-14
50
MHz
.
and
Phase
at
3
MHz)|
2-36 Performance Tests
Page 61
b.
On
the
Figure
4396B
2-14. B/R
,
set
the controls
Magnitude
as
follows:
Ratio/Phase
Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
1
Control Settings
Active
Channel:
CH
1
Input: B/R
F
ormat:
A
verage
A
ctive
LOG
MA
F
actor:
Channel:
G
5
CH
2
Input: B/R
Format: PHASE
Average Factor: 5
Source P
c. Set the step
d.
Press
4
Cal
5
ower:017 dBm
attenuator to 0 dB
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATION
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MENU
.
,
calibration. Wait for the completion of the sweep. Then press
K
ey
4
Ch
4
Meas
4
F
o
4
Bw/Avg
4
Ch 2
4
Meas
4
Format
4
Bw/Avg
4
Source
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RESPONSE
Strokes
5
1
N
5
,
5
rmat
5
N
5
,
5
5
,
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
B/R
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
LOG
,
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
MAG
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
FACTOR
B/R
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
PHASE
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AVERAGE FACTOR
5
,
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
POWER,4
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
THRU
5,4
-
to perform the response (THRU)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
,
4
5
NNNN
,
4
5
5
5,4
1
5,4
x1
7
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:RESPONSE
5
,
5,4
5
4
x1
5
x1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
e. Set the step attenuator to the rst setting 30 dB in the second column of Table 2-11.
Performance Tests 2-37
Page 62
T
able 2-11.
B/R Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Settings
1
f.
g.
h.
On
the
setting
P
erform
i.
Press
of
ii.
Press
iii.
Record
dynamic
the
iv
.
Press
v
.
Record
the test
the
Change
second
4396B,
+13
dBm
the
following
4
T
rigger
the sweep
4
Ma
rker
the
accuracy
rst
column of
5
to
4
+
the
result column
rst
column of
the step
and
third
4396B
Input Level
0
0
10
0
20 dB
N
N
POWER
5
press
in
N
N
NUMBER
5
,
4
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Source
third
steps
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
,
to
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OF
.
5
5
to
,
channel
move
channel
4
*
.
Use
T
the channel
move
1
marker
able
2
marker
the
2-11
of the
Table
2-11
attenuator setting
columns
of T
Step Attenuator 4396B
dB
dB
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
,
columns
measure
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
GROUPS
the
channel
reading
4396B
5
,
4
1
of
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
reading
the
5
30
dB
20 dB +3 dBm
10
dB
5
5
to
4
3
T
able
,
4
x1
2-11
set
.
dynamic
5
5
to
in
,
4
1
x1
marker
the
calculation
make
column
.
2
marker
reading
to
3
MHz.
directly in
phase measurement
.
and
able
2-11
4396B
,
and
power
perform
Source P
the source
accuracy
a
to
50
+13
0
.
sweep
MHz.
sheet
ower
dBm
7dBm
power to
.
W
for
corresponding
the performance
corresponding
setting
4-g
in
for
accordance
each
ait
for
the
the
magnitude
to
the
test record.
to
the
setting.
the rst
completion
input
input
with
the
level
Use
level
ratio
in
in
i.
Change
the
cable
connection
as
shown
in
Figure
2-15
.
2-38 Performance Tests
Page 63
Figure
j.
On
the
4396B
2-15. B/R
,
set
the controls
Magnitude
as
follows:
Ratio/Phase
Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Setup
2
k.
Set
the
l.
Press
4
Cal
calibration. W
Control Settings
Source P
A
ctive
A
verage
A
ctive
A
verage
5
ower:
0
Channel:
F
actor:
Channel:
F
actor:
attenuator
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATION MENU
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ait for the completion of the sweep
17
CH
10
CH
10
to
dBm
1
2
0
dB
.
NNNNN
,
K
ey
4
Source
4
Ch
4
Bw/Avg
4
Ch
4
Bw/Avg
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RESPONSE
Strokes
5
,
5
1
5
,
5
2
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNN
THRU
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
POWER
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
AVERAGE FACTOR
to perform the response (THRU)
. Then press
m. Set the step attenuator to the rst setting 10 dB in the
5
5
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
-
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
1
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
FACTOR
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
4
N
N
N
7
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NNNNNNNNN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
4
x1
N
5
,
4
1
N
5
,
4
1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE:RESPONSE
second column of T
,
4
0
,
4
0
5
5
,
4
x1
5
,
5
4
x1
NNNNNNN
able 2-12.
.
Performance Tests 2-39
Page 64
T
able 2-12.
B/R Dynamic
A
ccuracy
T
est
Settings
2
n.
o.
P
erform
i.
Press
completion
ii.
Press
iii.
Record
dynamic
the
iv
.
Press
v
.
Record
the
the
Change
and
perform
the
4
4
rst
4
test
rst
the
following
Trigger
of
5
Ma
rk
er
the
channel
accuracy
column
5
to
+
the
channel
result
column
step
steps
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NUMBER OF
5
,
the
sweep
5
to
,
4
*
.
of
T
move
the
column
of
T
attenuator
4-n
for
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
move
1
marker
Use
able
channel
2
marker
of
able
each
4396B
Input Level
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
measure
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GROUPS
.
the
channel
reading
the
4396B
2-12
.
2
reading
the
phase
2-12
.
setting
setting.
40
dB
50
dB
60 dB
70
dB
80 dB
90
dB
100
dB
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
5
,
4
1
reading
marker
measurement
in
accordance
Step Attenuator
10
20 dB
30
40 dB
50
60 dB
70
dynamic
,
5
,
4
0
1
marker to
in
the
column
to
3
directly
accuracy
5
to
4
x1
make
50 MHz.
calculation
corresponding
MHz.
in
the
corresponding
with
the
dB
dB
dB
dB
.
a
sweep
sheet
for the
performance
second
column
.
W
to
test
to
ait
for
magnitude
the
input
record.
the
input
of
T
the
ratio
level in
Use
level
able 2-12
in
,
5.
Calculate
given
in
the
the
calculation
test
results
for
sheet.
the
magnitude
Record
the
ratio
test
dynamic
results
in
accuracy
the
performance
test
using
test
the
equations
record.
2-40 Performance Tests
Page 65
11. MA
(NA)
Description
a
power splitter
measurements
ideal
from
In
this test,
1
MHz
low
frequency
frequency
output
two
signal
values
the
calculation
Specication
GNITUDE RA
test applies
. The
magnitude ratio
linear phase
the
and
from
range
ports
.
The
paths
.
The
frequency
the RF
.
It
then
magnitude
value
.
frequency
1
MHz
range
using
is
measured
connections
(from
sheet.
TIO/PHASE FREQUENCY
OUT signal
measures
of
0
response
to
1.8
GHz.
a
linear
twice
are
the
power
response
to
the
ratio
dB
.
is
frequency
while
reversed
splitter
without
the
4396B
magnitude
frequency
The
phase
measured
is
done
reversing
to
output
the
R
input
ratio
response
frequency
at
two
to
measure
sweep
remove
port
tracking
and
and
is
frequency
mode
the
connections
the
to
the
is
calculated
either
phase
measured
response
the
frequency
.
The
frequency
frequency
4396B
RESPONSE TEST
the
A
or
B
input
through
of
the
A/R
and
B/R
as
the
is
measured
ranges
of
the
tracking
input
using
deviation
,
from
response
response
power
between
port)
from
equations
as
the
100
kHz
at
at
splitter's
measured
provided
from
the
deviation
to
a
each
two
the
in
Magnitude
@
0
@100 k
@frequency
Phase
@
0
100
frequency
T
est
Equipment
Two-way
RF
cable
N(m)-N(m) adapter
Procedure
1.
Press
the controls as follows:
ratio
20
dBm
input,
frequency
frequency response
20 dBm
1:
4
Meas
Control Settings
Active Channel: CH 2
Statistics: ON
Dual Channel: ON
Source Power:014 dBm
input,
k
frequency
P
ower
kit
:
:
:
:
Includes
cables
in this
NNNNNNNNNN
ANALYZER TYPE
5
,
accuracy
IF
BW
1
MHz
IF
BW
<
1
MHz
Splitter
:
::
::
::
:
:
::
::
::
three
61
cm
test.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
(A/R,
3
<
1
MHz
:
:
:
:
:
(Deviation
3
1
MHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N(m)-N(m)
NNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNN
,
B/R)
kHz,
:
:
:
:
:
:
kHz,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NETWORK ANALYZER
C
23
6
5
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
from
C
23
6
5
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
cables
phase
Key Strokes
5
4
Ch 2
4
5
,
Utility
changes to
4
5
Display
changes to
4
5
Source
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
Linear
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
::
::
matched.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STATISTICS on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
DUAL CHAN on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
POWER,4-5,415,445,4x15
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Phase)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
4
Preset
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STATISTICS ON off
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DUAL CHAN ON off
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Use
two
5
to initialize
(A/R,
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N(m)-N(m)
B/R)
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
NNNNNN
(Then the softkey label
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
1
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
0.5
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
6
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
3 deg
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
11667A
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11851B
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
1250-1475
phase
matched
the 4396B. Then set
(Then the softkey label
.)
.)
dB
dB
deg
1
Performance Tests 2-41
Page 66
IF
BW: 100
2.
|A/R Magnitude
a.
Connect the
Hz
Ratio/Phase
test
equipment
4
Bw/Avg
Frequency
as
shown
N
NN
NN
IF
5
,
Response
in
setup
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
5
5
5
BW
1
,
T
of
,
4
4
1
0
est|
Figure
,
4
,
0
2-16
5
4
x1
.
b.
c.
Set
Press
Figure
the
Control
A
Input:
F
A
Input:
F
Start Frequency:
Stop Frequency:
Number of P
4
Trigger
4396B
ctive
ormat:
ctive
ormat:
5
2-16.
controls
Settings
Channel:
A/R
LOG
Channel:
A/R
PHASE
NNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SINGLE
,
A/R
Magnitude
as
follows:
CH
1
MA
G
CH
2
100
kHz
1
MHz
oints: 50
to make a sweep
d. Set the 4396B controls as follows:
Control Settings
Active Channel: CH 1
Data!Memory
Active Channel: CH 2
Data!Memory
Ratio/Phase
K
ey
Strokes
5
4
Ch
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
Meas
4
Fo
4
Ch
4
Meas
4
F
4
Start
4
Stop
4
Sweep
A/R
5
,
NN
N
N
N
N
LOG
5
,
rmat
5
2
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A/R
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
PHASE
5
,
o
rmat
5
,
5
,
4
4
1
5
,
5
,
4
4
1
NNNNNNNN
NUMBER
5
,
.W
ait for the completion of the sweep
Key Strokes
5
4
Ch 1
4
Display
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
DATA!MEMORY
trace is stored.)
4
5
Ch 2
4
Display
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
DATA!MEMORY
trace is stored.)
Frequency
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
MAG
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
5
,
5
,
4
0
M/
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
0
k/m
5
of POINTS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Response
T
est
Setup
5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
5
x1
0
5
5
5
,
4
,
4
,
.
(A beep indicates that the
(A beep indicates that the
2-42 Performance Tests
Page 67
e. Reverse
Figure 2-16
f.
Press
4
g.
Set
the
the cable
.
5
T
rigger
4396B
connections of
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
,
controls
N
N
N
NN
to make
as
a sweep
follows:
the
4396B
.
W
ait
A
and
R
for
inputs
the
as
shown
completion
of
the
in
setup
sweep
2
of
.
h.
Press
maximum
maximum
i.
Record
magnitude
j.
Press
or
horizontal
k.
Press
mean
the
l.
Press
and
minimum
Control
A
ctive
Data
A
uto Scale
A
ctive
Data
A
uto
4
Ch
the
4
Ch
5
4
and
+
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
PHASE
value
display
4
Search
minimum
Channel:
Math:
Channel:
Math:
Scale
5
,
4
Sea
1
and
and
larger
ratio
5
,
4
Scale
2
turn
position.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFFSET
is
displayed
.
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
points
points
Settings
G*(D
G*(D
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
rch
minimum
minimum
value
of
the
5
,
Ref
the
RPG
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
and enter
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
and
on
.
CH
1
A
T
A+MEM)
CH
2
A
T
A+MEM)
N
N
N
N
N
and
4
Sea
points
points
in
frequency
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL
knob
as
4
Search
the
NN
NN
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
a
marker
5
,
trace
N
N
to
on
.
performance
N
N
N
N
N
the
N
N
N
N
N
MIN
N
5
,
rch
the
range
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
DELAY
vary
trace
statistic
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
.
Compare
K
ey
4
Ch
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
Scale
4
Ch
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
Scale
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MIN
trace
100
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
move
N
N
N
N
Strokes
5
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
DATA
5
,
y
5
5
4
,
4
5
x1
N
NN
AUTO
5
,
Ref
5
2
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
5
5
,
4
4
x1
5
N
NN
AUTO
5
,
Ref
N
to
move
.
Compare the
test
record
kHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
MENU
,
electrical
mean
value
(mean)
the
the
absolute
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
SCALE
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MATH
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
SCALE
the
channel
(\T
to
1
MHz).
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
delay
using
in
N
until
the
2
values
ELECTRICAL
channel
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
[DATA]
NN
NN
absolute
est
N
N
N
N
N
N
upper
marker
N
,
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
1
marker
Result" column
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
DELAY
the
trace
numeric
right-hand
to
at
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
DATA+MEM
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
DATA+MEM
to
values
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
.
Then press
is
keys
.
the
maximum
maximum
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
at
in
The
corner
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
,
the
for A/R
the
most
trace
and
NN
NN
NN
NN
,
N
N
NN
NN
NN
,
5
4
*
of
m.
Record
phase
n.
Set
o. Connect the test equipment as shown in setup 1 of Figure 2-16.
p. Set the 4396B controls as follows:
the
larger
of
the
the
4396B
Control Settings
A
ctive
Data Math: D
Active Channel: CH 2
Data Math: D
Electrical Delay: 0 sec
Phase Oset: 0
value
frequency
controls
Channel:
ATA
ATA
in
range
as
CH
the
performance
100
follows:
1
test record
kHz
to
1 MHz).
Key
Strokes
5
4
Ch
1
NNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH [G*(D+M)]
5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH: DATA
4
4
NNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH: DATA
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ELECTRICAL DELAY,405,4x15
N
PHASE OFFSET,405,4x15
,
Display
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
Ch 2
Display
Scale Ref
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH [G*(D+M)]
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNN
ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU
5
,
(\Test
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT GAIN & OFS
,
NNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT GAIN &
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Result" column
NNNNNN
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
,
Performance Tests 2-43
for
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
OFS
A/R
Page 68
q.
r.
Press
Set
the
4
T
Control
Start
Frequency: 1
Stop
Frequency: 1.8
Number
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
rigger
4396B
controls as
Settings K
MHz
GHz
of P
oints: 201
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
to
make
a
sweep
follows:
ey Strokes
5
,
Sta
Stop
Sw
.
rt
eep
W
5
,
5
ait
4
1
5
4
1
N
N
NUMBER
,
4
4
4
5
,
,
NN
for
5
4
M/
5
5
4
,
4
.
8
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
5
,
4
G/n
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
of POINTS
completion of
NN
NN
NN
NN
,
5
5
,
4
,
4
2
the sweep
4
0
5
5
,
4
1
x1
.
s.
Reverse
Figure
t.
Press
4
u.
Set
the
v.
Press
4
maximum and
maximum and
Control
A
ctive
Data
A
ctive
Data
the
2-16
T
rigger
4396B
Control
A
ctive
Data
A
uto
A
ctive Channel:
Data
A
uto
Ch
1
Settings
Channel:
!
Memory
Channel:
!
Memory
cable
.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
controls
Settings
Channel:
Math:
Scale
Math: G*(D
Scale
5
,
4
Sea
rch
minimum points
minimum points
CH
CH
connections
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
make
as
follows:
CH
G*(D
A
T
CH
A
T
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
and
1
2
of
the
a
sweep
1
A+MEM)
2
A+MEM)
4
Sea
rch
on the
.
4396B
5
,
K
ey
4
Ch
1
4
Display
trace
4
Ch
2
4
Displa
trace
.
W
K
ey
4
Ch
1
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
4
Scale
4
Ch
2
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
4
Scale Ref
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MIN
trace
Strokes
5
NN
N
DATA
5
,
is
stored.)
5
NN
N
DATA
5
,
y
is
stored.)
A
and
ait
for
Strokes
5
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
5
,
4
5
x1
5
,
Ref
5
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
5
,
4
5
x1
5
,
N
to
move
.
Compare
NN
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
N
N
N
AUTO
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
N
N
N
AUTO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
!
MEMORY
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
!
MEMORY
R
inputs
the
completion
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SCALE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
SCALE
channel
the
absolute
N
N
N
N
N
N
(A
beep
N
N
N
N
N
(A
beep
as shown
of the
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1
indicates
indicates
in setup
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA+MEM
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA+MEM
,
marker
values
sweep.
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
to
at
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
the
N
N
2
N
N
N
N
that
that
of
N
,
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
the
the
NN
NN
N
N
N
,
N
,
w.
Record
magnitude ratio
x.
Press
or
horizontal position.
y.
Press
mean value is displayed as a marker statistic (mean)
the display
z.
Press
and minimum points on the trace. Compare the absolute values at the maximum and
minimum points.
aa. Record the larger value in the performance test record (\Test Result" column for A/R
phase of the frequency range 1 MHz to 1.8 GHz).
bb. Set the 4396B controls as follows:
2-44 Performance Tests
the
larger
5,4
4
Ch 2
5
and turn the RPG knob to vary the electrical delay until
4
+
NNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PHASE
.
4
5
Search
of the
Scale Ref
OFFSET
N
NNNNN
NNNNN
,
MAX
value
in
the
performance
frequency
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU
5
,
NNNN
and enter the trace mean value using numeric keys
and
4
Search
range
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
NNNNN
NNNNN
5
,
MIN
to move the channel 2 marker to the maximum
test
record
1
MHz
to
1.8
GHz).
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
NN
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL DELAY
,
in the upper right-hand corner of
N
N
(\T
N
N
est
Result"
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
the trace is in the most
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
column
N
N
N
. Then press
. The trace
for
A/R
5
4
*
Page 69
3.
|B/R
a.
Connect
Control
A
ctive Channel:
Data
A
ctive
Data
Electrical Delay:
Phase
Magnitude Ratio/Phase
the test
Settings K
CH 1
Math: D
Math:
Oset:
AT
Channel:
D
A
T
0
equipment as
A
CH
A
0
ey Strokes
5
4
Ch
1
4
5
,
Displa
y
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
Ch
2
Displa
y
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
Scale Ref
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
setup
NN
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
DATA MATH:
2
sec
Frequency Response
shown in
4
4
N
DATA MATH:
4
N
ELECTRICAL
N
PHASE
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
DATA
NN
N
N
N
N
5
N
N
NN
NN
N
OFFSET
MATH [G*(D+M)]
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
DATA
N
N
,
NN
N
N
1
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
DATA
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL DELAY
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DELAY
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
Test|
of
Figure
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
DEFAULT GAIN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
[G*(D+M)]
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DEFAULT GAIN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
,
4
5
,
4
4
x1
0
2-17
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
x1
,
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
&OFS
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
MENU
&OFS
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
0
5
.
b. Set the
Figure 2-17.
4396B controls as follows:
Control Settings
Active Channel: CH 1
Input: B/R
Format: LOG MA
Active Channel: CH 2
Input: B/R
Format: PHASE
Start Frequency: 100 kHz
Stop Frequency: 1 MHz
Number of Points: 50
B/R Magnitude
G
Ratio/Phase
Key
Strokes
5
4
Ch 1
NNNNNNNNNNN
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
B/R
5
,
Meas
Format
Ch 2
Meas
Format
Start
Stop
Sweep
NNNNNNNNN
5
LOG
,
5
NNNNNNNNNNN
B/R
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
PHASE
5,415,405,405,4
5,415,4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
NUMBER of POINTS,455,405,4x15
Frequency
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MAG
k/m
5
M/
Response
5
T
est
Setup
Performance Tests 2-45
Page 70
c.
d.
Press
Set the
4
T
rigger
4396B
N
NN
NN
SINGLE
5
,
controls
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to make
as
a sweep
follows:
.W
ait for
the completion
of the
sweep
.
e.
Reverse the
Figure
f.
Press
g.
Set
h.
Press
maximum
maximum
Control
A
ctive Channel:
Data
!
A
ctive Channel:
Data
!
2-17
.
4
T
rigger
the
4396B
Control
A
ctive
Data
A
uto Scale
Active
Data Math:
A
uto
5
4
,
Ch
1
and
and
Settings K
CH
1
Memory
CH
2
Memory
cable connections
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
controls
Channel:
Math:
Channel: CH
Scale
4
Sea
minimum
minimum
N
Settings
G*(D
G*(DA
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
rch
to
make a
as
follows:
CH
1
A
T
A+MEM)
2
T
A+MEM)
N
N
N
N
N
and
points on
points.
4
of
Sea
the
sweep
5
,
rch
the
ey
4
Ch
1
4
Displa
trace
4
Ch
2
4
Displa
trace
4396B
.
W
K
ey
4
Ch 1
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
4
Scale
4
Ch
2
4
Displa
4.5
,
4
4
Scale
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MIN
trace
Strokes
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
is stored.)
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
is stored.)
B
and
ait
for
Strokes
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
5
5
,
4
5
x1
N
N
AUTO
5
,
Ref
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
5
5
,
4
x1
5
N
N
AUTO
5
,
Ref
to
move
.
Compare
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
R
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
!
N
NN
NN
!
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
inputs
N
MATH
N
N
N
MATH
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
as
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[DATA]
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
channel
absolute
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MEMORY
NN
NN
MEMORY
completion
NN
N
N
N
NN
NN
SCALE
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
SCALE
the
(A
beep
(A
beep
shown
of
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
1
marker
indicates
indicates
in
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA+MEM
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA+MEM
,
values
setup
sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
to
at
N
N
N
NN
N
the
2
.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
that
that
of
N
,
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
N
N
the
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
,
i.
Record
magnitude
j.
Press
or
horizontal
k.
Press
mean value is displayed as a marker statistic (mean) in the
the display
l.
Press
and minimum points on the trace
minimum points
m. Record the larger value in the performance test record (\T
phase of the frequency range 100 kHz to 1 MHz).
2-46 Performance Tests
4
5
4
and turn
+
N
N
PHASE
4
the
Ch
2
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
Search
larger
ratio
of
5
,
4
Scale
the RPG
position.
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFFSET
.
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX
5
,
.
value
the
Ref
N
N
N
N
N
NN
and
5
,
NN
NN
in
the
performance
frequency
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL
knob to
and
4
Search
N
enter the
NNNNNNNNNNN
MIN
5
,
test
record
range
100
kHz
to
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
N
MENU
electrical
DELAY
vary
trace mean
to move the channel 2 marker to the
. Compare
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
,
value using
the absolute values at the maximum and
(\T
est
1
MHz).
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL
delay
N
until
numeric keys
upper right-hand corner of
est Result" column for B/R
Result"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
DELAY
the
NN
NN
N
N
N
trace
column
N
N
N
.
Then
is
.The
maximum
in
for
press
the
trace
B/R
4
most
5
*
Page 71
n. Set
the 4396B
controls as
follows:
o.
Connect
p.
Set
q.
Press
r.
Set
Control Settings
Active
Data Math:
Active
Data
Electrical
Phase
the
4396B
Control
Start
Stop Frequency:
Number of
4
T
rigger
the
4396B
Channel:
Channel: CH
Math:
Oset:
the
test
controls
Frequency:
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
controls
Settings
NN
NN
CH
D
A
T
A
DA
TA
Delay:
equipment
N
N
N
0
Points:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
as
1
1.8 GHz
to make
as
1
2
sec
as
shown
follows:
MHz
201
a
follows:
K
4
Ch 1
4
Displa
N
N
DATA
4
Ch
4
Display
N
NN
DATA
4
Scale
N
N
ELECTRICAL
N
N
PHASE
in
K
4
Sta
4
Stop
4
Sweep
sweep
N
N
N
ey
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ey
.
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
2
N
N
N
N
N
NN
setup
rt
W
Strokes
5
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
MATH:
5
NN
NN
DATA MATH
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
MATH:
5
,
Ref
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFFSET
1
Strokes
5
5
,
,
4
1
5
,
5
,
4
1
N
N
N
N
NUMBER
5
,
ait
for
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
MATH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
DATA
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DATA
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
DELAY
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
,
4
Figure
5
,
5
,
4
4
8
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
of
the
completion
N
N
N
0
G/n
N
N
ELECTRICAL
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
of
4
M/
5
4
.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
[G*(D+M)]
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
DEFAULT
,
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
[G*(D+M)]
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DEFAULT
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DELAY
N
N
N
5
,
4
0
5
,
4
x1
2-17
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
POINTS
N
N
N
N
NN
,
.
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
5
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
4
NN
,
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
GAIN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
MENU
,
5
x1
NN
NN
5
5
,
,
4
,
4
2
0
of
the
sweep
N
&
OFS
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
&
OFS
5
5
,
4
4
1
x1
.
Control
A
ctive
Data
A
ctive
Data
s.
Reverse
Figure
t.
Press
u.
Set
v.
Press
maximum and minimum points on the trace. Compare the absolute values at the
maximum and minimum points.
the
2-16
4
T
rigger
the
4396B
Control Settings
Active Channel: CH 1
Data Math: G*(D
Auto Scale
Active Channel: CH 2
Data Math: G*(D
Auto Scale
4
Ch 1
.
5,4
!
!
cable
5
,
Search
Settings
Channel:
Memory
Channel:
Memory
connections
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
controls
NNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
MAX
CH
1
CH
2
N
NN
to
make
as
follows:
ATA+MEM)
ATA+MEM)
and
of
a
4
Search
K
ey
4
Ch
4
Displa
trace
4
Ch
4
Displa
trace
the
4396B
sweep
.
Key Strokes
4
Ch 1
4
Displa
4.5,4
4
Scale Ref
4
Ch 2
4
Display
4.5,455,4x15
4
Scale Ref
NNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
MIN
Strokes
5
1
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NN
NNNNN
N
as
N
N
(A
N
N
(A
shown
beep
beep
of
NNNNNNN
,
,
indicates
indicates
in
setup
the
sweep
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA+MEM
NNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA+MEM
DATA
!
5
,
y
is
stored.)
5
2
N
N
N
DATA
5
,
y
is
stored.)
B
and
W
ait
for
5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA MATH [DATA]
5
,
y
5,4
x1
5
5
,
5
NNNN
DATA MATH [DATA]
5
,
5
,
to move the channel 1 marker to the
MEMORY
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
!
MEMORY
R
inputs
the
completion
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
AUTO SCALE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AUTO SCALE
NNNNNNNN
that
that
2of
.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN
,
NNNN
,
GAIN
the
the
,
NNNNNNNNNN
,
Performance Tests 2-47
Page 72
w. Record
the larger
magnitude ratio
x.
Press
4
Ch
2
or
4+5
and
horizontal position.
N
N
N
NN
NN
y.
z.
Press
mean
the
Press
and
NN
PHASE
value
display
4
Sea
rch
minimum points
minimum
aa.
Record the
phase
of
the
5
,
4
Scale
turn the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFFSET
is
displayed
.
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
points.
larger
frequency
value in
of the
Ref
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
value
NN
and
the performance
frequency range
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
enter the
as
a
Sea
rch
the
trace
in
the
range
N
to vary
marker
5
,
1
N
ELECTRICAL
5
,
RPG knob
N
N
N
N
and
4
on
1MHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
DELAY MENU
the electrical
trace mean
statistic
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MIN
to
move
.
Compare
performance
MHz
to
1.8
test record
to 1.8
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
(mean)
the
the
test
GHz).
(\T
GHz).
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
ELECTRICAL
,
N
delay until
value using
in the
channel
absolute
record
2
values
(\T
est
Result"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
numeric
NN
the
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
DELAY
trace
column
N
N
N
N
N
N
.
keys
upper right-hand
marker
est
to
at
the
Result"
the
maximum
column
for
Then press
is
in
the
most
.
The
trace
corner of
maximum
and
for
B/R
B/R
5
4
*
2-48 Performance Tests
Page 73
12. CALIBRA
Description
test
CAL
uses a
OUT
power meter
connector
Specication
TOR AMPLITUDE
and
and power
checks
that
sensor to
the level
ACCURA
CY TEST
measure the
accuracy meets
(SA)
actual signal
amplitude at
the specication.
4396B
Calibrator
T
est
Equipment
P
ower Meter
P
ower Sensor
N(f)-BNC(m)
Procedure
1.
Connect the
sensor
.
2.
Connect
accuracy
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
adapter
power sensor
the
test equipment
(
0
20
dBm
20MHz)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
to the
power meter
as shown
::
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
in
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
Figure
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
.
Calibrate
2-18
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
0.4
dB
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
436A
Opt.
022
,
437B
,
or
438A
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
8482A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
1250-1477
the
power
meter
for
the
power
.
Figure 2-18. Calibrator Amplitude A
ccuracy T
est Setup
3. Wait for the power meter reading to settle. Then record the power meter reading in the
performance test record (\Test Result" column).
Performance Tests 2-49
Page 74
13. DISPLA
Description
test
uses the
in
the
4396B
In
this
measured
the
data
test,
values
with the
spectrum
the
Specication
YED A
VERAGE
4396B marker
analyzer
noise
level
(trace mean
are
converted
marker statistics
NOISE LEVEL
statistics function
mode
when the
value) is
to
log
magnitude format
function.
to measure
4396B S
input is
measured in
[dBm]. This
TEST (S
the displayed
terminated.
linear format
is done
A)
average noise
[W
att].
Then
to avoid
level
the
skewing
Displayed
@frequency
@10
kHz
T
est
Equipment
50
termination,
Procedure
1.
Connect
average
frequency
the
test
noise
10
MHz,
type-N(m)
equipment
level
ref. level
<
10
MHz, ref.
:
:
:
:
:
as
shown
:
0
:
:
:
40 dBm,
level
:
:
:
::
in
::
::
:
Figure
att.=0
0
:
:
:
:
2-19
40
:
:
:
dB
dBm,
:
:
:
:
.
:
att.=0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
909C
:
:
<
dB
[
0
150+3
:
:
:
:
:
Opt 012
:
:
:
:
or part
f(GHz)
:
<
0
125
]
dBm/Hz
dBm/Hz
of 85032B
2.
Press
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
Meas
ANALYZER TYPE
the controls as follows:
Control Settings Key Strokes
Reference Value:040 dBm
Input Att.: 0 dB
2-50 Performance Tests
Figure 2-19. A
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
SPECTRUM ANALYZER,4
verage Noise Level T
Preset
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
Scale Ref
5
,
REFERENCE VALUE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
Scale Ref
5
,
ATTEN,405,4x15
est Setup
5
to initialize the 4396B. Then set
4-5,445,405,4x15
Page 75
3.
Set
rst
Unit:
Statistics:
the
controls as
settings
WA
TT
listed
ON
follows.
in
T
able
(This sets
2-13
).
5
4
4
changes to
the center
F
o
rmat
Utilit
,
N
NN
STATISTICS
5
,
y
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
WATT
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
STATISTICS ON
frequency,
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
on OFF
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
off
(Then the
NN
NN
N
frequency span,
NN
NN
N
.)
softkey
and RBW
label
to
the
4.
Press
5.
Record
column).
right-hand
Control
Center
RBW:
10
Frequency
5
T
rigger
the
,
4396B
The
corner
4
Settings
Frequency:
Hz
Span:
T
able
2-13.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
trace
mean
of
the
N
to
SINGLE
trace
10
100
Hz
Center
make
mean
value
display
kHz
Displayed
Frequency
10
100
1
10
100
500
1.0
1.4
1.8
a
sweep
value
[Unit]
is
displayed
.
K
ey
4
Center
4
Bw/Avg
4
Span
A
verage
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
.
W
Strokes
5
5
,
,
4
1
N
NN
N
RES
5
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
1
4396B
RB
W
10
Hz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
10
kHz
ait
for
in
the
as
a
5
5
,
4
4
k/m
0
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
BW
,
4
1
5
5
,
,
4
0
calculation
marker
4
0
Noise
Level
Frequency
the
completion
x1
statistic
5
5
,
4
sheet
0
5
,
T
100
5
4
x1
est
Span
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
1
Hz
of
(\Trace
(mean)
Settings
the
sweep
Mean
in
the
.
[Unit]"
upper
6.
Change
T
able
7.
Convert
calculation
the
2-13
the
center
.
Then
unit
sheet.
frequency
repeat
of
the
Record
steps
test
the
,
frequency
4
and
results
test
results
5
for
from
span,
each
[W
att]
[dBm]
and
RBW
setting.
to
[dBm]
in
the
settings
using the
performance
in accordance
with
equation given
test
record.
Performance Tests 2-51
in the
Page 76
14. AMPLITUDE
Description
test
signal
is
by
inserting
value
at
inserted
The
amplitude
sources
the
4396B
R
atio/Phase
checks the
applied
known
the
attenuator
attenuation's
at
RBW
network
Dynamic
4396B amplitude
to
the
4396B
attenuation
calibrated values
delity performance
3kHz
analyzer
A
FIDELITY TEST
delity at
Sinput
setting
ccuracy T
of
are exactly
mode.
through a
values
.
0dB
. Then
at RBWs
same as
Because the
est
,
the delity
Each signal
.
(SA)
RBWs of
step attenuator
the measured
3
kHz are
those
dynamic accuracy
test
10 kHz
amplitude [dB]
not
of
the
magnitude
at
the
and 1
. The
is measured
values are
tested
is
RBW
MHz. A
signal
compared
in
this
ratio
tested
3
kHz
50
amplitude
to a
with
test.
The
dynamic
in
the
is
omitted.
MHz
CW
is
varied
reference
to
the
error
accuracy
Magnitude
in
The amplitude
delity is
and
not
the
Two
output
reduce
measurement
Specication
Amplitude
(dB
0
30
0
40
0
50
0
60 dB
0
70
1
: @23
not checked
at
signal levels
necessary
delity
6
dB
connector
the
Log
from
0
dB
dB
>
dB
>
dB
>
>
dB
>
6
because
at
higher
xed
measurement
uncertainties
delity
scale
Range Amplitude
Ref.
range
range
range
range
range
range
C,010 dBm[
5
delity performance
at signal
0
50
the
signal
attenuators
and
the
Level)
0
30
dB
0
40
dB
0
50 dB
0
60
dB
0
70
dB
0
80
dB
ref. level
uncertainties
@1
dB
(from
delity
levels
with
4396B
listed
Hz
levels
a
S
RBW
6
0.05
6
0.07
6
0.12
6
0.4
6
1.2 dB
6
4
0
at low
the
performance
and
VSWR
input,
in
the
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
input att
signal
0
60
reference
the
delity at
of
respectively
caused
performance
3
kHz
]
0
levels
dB
(from
at
1.015 are
by
@10
50 dBm except for gain compression
are
the
level)
at
these levels
an
RBW
connected to
.
These
mismatch
test
record
kHz
RB
6
0.3
6
0.3
6
0.4
6
0.7
6
1.5
6
4.3 dB
not
tested
reference
an
RBW
of
xed attenuators
error
Fidelity
W
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
level)
of
are
theoretically
3
kHz.
.
When
are
valid.
1
300
kHz
in
this
test.
at
an
1
MHz.
the signal
they
are
@1
MHz
That
RBW
of
These
tests
determined
generator
are used
used, the
RB
W
6
1.0
dB
6
1.0
dB
6
1.2 dB
6
1.4
dB
6
2.2
dB
{
is
,
the
10
kHz
are
by
to
3
MHz
Test Equipment
Signal Generator
Step Attenuator1,10dBstep
Attenuator
N(m)-N(m) cable
BNC(m)-BNC(m) cable, 122 cm
6 dB Fixed Attenuation (two required)
1: Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 60 dB at 50 MHz are required.
2: Required when using a programmable step attenuator 8496G.
2-52 Performance Tests
:::::::::::::
2
Driver
:
::::::: ::::::: :::::: :::::
, 61 cm (two required)
:::::::::::::::::::::::::
, VSWR
:::::: ::::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::::
::::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::
1.02
:::::::::::::::::
:::::: ::::::: ::::::: :::::
::::::::::::::::::::
::::::: :::::: ::::::: ::::::: :::
::::
:::::::::::
:
8663A or 8642B
8496A/G Option 001 and H60
:::::: ::::::: :::::: :
11500B or part of 11851B
8491A Opt 006 & Opt H60
11713A
PN 8120-1840
Page 77
Procedure
1.
Record the
V
alue" column).
2.
Initialize the
step attenuator
signal generator
50 MHz
. Then
calibration values
set the
controls as
in the
follows:
calculation sheet
(\Calibration
3.
Connect the
Note
Controls
Frequency
Amplitude
test equipment
Connect
4396B
conguration,
same
the
signal
EXT
REF
reference
as shown
generator's
Input
both
the
frequency
Settings
50 MHz
+2 dBm
in Figure
on
the
signal
10
rear
generator
to
obtain
2-20
MHz
panel
a
.
frequency
as
shown
and
the
stable
measurement.
reference
in
Figure
4396B
are
output
2-20.
phase
to
the
With this
locked
to
the
4.
Press
4
Meas
5
set the controls as
Control Settings
Center Frequency: 50 MHz
Reference Level:
Input Att.: 10 dB
Figure
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER TYPE
,
NN
follows:
N
2-20. Amplitude
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
,
0
10 dBm
N
Fidelity T
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
Key Strokes
4
Center
4
Scale Ref
5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
5
,
REFERENCE VALUE
5,4
5,4
NNNNNNNNN
4
Scale Ref
5
,
ATTEN
est Setup
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
N
,
5,4
4
Preset
M/
5
to initialize the 4396B. Then
5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5,4
5,4
,
4
1
-
0
5,4
x1
5
NNNNNNNN
5
5
,
5
,
,
4
1
4
4
x1
0
5. Set the 4396B controls as follows to measure the amplitude delity at RBW 10 kHz.
Control Settings Key Strokes
Frequency Span: 1 MHz
RBW: 10 kHz
VBW: 300 Hz
4
Span
4
Bw/Avg
4
Bw/Avg
5,415,4
5
,
5
M/
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RES BW,415,405,4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
VIDEO BW,435,405,405,4x15
k/m
5
Performance Tests 2-53
Page 78
6.
7.
Set the
On the
step attenuator
4396B,
press
4
Search
to 0
dB.
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
,
MAX
N
to
move the
marker to
the peak
of the
carrier
.
5
8. On
9.
10.
11.
12.
the signal
dB
.
On
the
sweep
Press
on
the peak
Set the
P
erform
a.
Press
b.
Press
c.
Record
RBW
reference
generator
4396B
,
press
.
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
4
,
Sea
rch
of the
step attenuator
the
following
N
N
SINGLE
5
4
4
of
Trigger
Sea
rch
the
10
,
5
,
delta
kHz.
level
N
N
N
MAX
,
adjust
4
Trigger
,
4
Ma
rker
carrier (reference
to
T
able 2-14.
steps
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
.
marker
Use
the
in
the
NN
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
NN
N
N
N
1MODE
5
,
the
Reference
to
N
to
make
reading
\4396B
rst
column
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
rst
dB from
measure
amplitude
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
to
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
MENU
level of
setting
Amplitude Fidelity
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
sweep
in
the calculation
Reading" column
of
make
N
N
NN
N
N
N
FIXED
,
10
Level
10
dB
20
dB
30
dB
40
dB
50
dB
60
dB
the
.
Table
until
a
sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
the
dB
in
Step Attenuator
amplitude
W
ait
for
2-14.
the
4396B
.
W
ait
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
1MKR
to
place
amplitude
the
the
delity).
second
T
est
Settings
10
20
30
40
50
60
delity.
completion
sheet
for
corresponding to
marker
for
the
the
column
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
the
reads
0
completion
delta
reference
of
T
able
1
of
the
sweep
amplitude
the
dB
10 dB
of
2-14
.
delity
from
6
0.1
the
marker
.
at
the
an
13.
Change
Then
14.
Set the
15. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB
16.
On the 4396B, press
the peak of the carrier
17. On the signal generator, adjust the amplitude until the 4396B marker reads010 dB60.1
dB.
18. On the 4396B, press
sweep.
19.
Press
on the peak of the carrier (reference level of the amplitude delity).
2-54 Performance Tests
the
attenuator
perform step
4396B controls
Control
Frequency
RBW:
VBW: 30 kHz
Trigger: CONTINUOUS
4
5
,
Search
12 for
as
Settings K
Span: 50
1MHz
4
Marker
.
4
Trigger
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX,4
Marker
5
setting in
each
setting.
follows
5
5
,
to
MHz
.
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1MODE MENU
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
SINGLE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1MODE MENU
accordance with
measure
4
Span
4
Bw/Avg
4
Bw/Avg
4
Trigger
to make a sweep.Wait for the completion of the
the
ey Strokes
5
5
,
4
,
4
5
N
N
N
N
RES
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
VIDEO BW
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
CONTINUOUS
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1MODE OFF
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
FIXED 1MKR
the second
amplitude
5
0
N
N
N
NN
5
,
4
M/
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
BW
,
NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
,
4
to place the delta reference marker
5
,
4
1
,
4
3
Search
delity
5
4
M/
5,4
5,4
0
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX
5
,
column of
at
RBW
5
k/m
to move the marker to
T
1
able
MHz.
2-14
.
Page 79
20. Set
the step
attenuator to
Table
the
2-15.
rst
setting
Amplitude
10
dB
in
the
Fidelity
second
T
est
column
Settings
of
2
T
able 2-15
.
21.
22.
23.
P
erform
a.
Press
b.
Press
c.
Record
at
an
reference
Change
Then
perform
Calculate
results
in
the
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
the
RBW
the
the
the
following
rch
steps
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
,
1
MHz.
in
.
marker
the
5
delta
of
level
attenuator
step
21
for
test
results
performance
N
N
N
N
Use
rst
using
to
setting
each
test
dB
from
Reference
to
measure
make
a
sweep
reading
the
in
\4396B
column
in
setting.
the
equations
record.
Step
Level
0
10
dB
0
20 dB
0
30
dB
0
40
dB
0
50
dB
the
amplitude
.
W
ait
the
calculation
Reading"
of
T
able
2-15
accordance
given
Attenuator
delity
for
the
sheet
column
.
with
the
in
the
10 dB
20
dB
30
dB
40
dB
50
dB
.
completion
for
the amplitude
corresponding
second
column
calculation
of
the
sheet.
sweep
to the
of
T
able
Record
.
delity
dB
2-15
from
the
.
test
Performance Tests 2-55
Page 80
15. INPUT
(S
A)
Description
test measures
from
10 dB
In
this test,
signal
amplitude is
the
other measurement
exclusively
signal
level
constant.
attenuator
attenuator
Two
output
reduce the
measurement uncertainties
Specication
A
F
6
dB
xed
connector
input
@20
dB
@50
dB
ATTENU
the 4396B
to
60
dB
.
The
a
50
MHz
CW
measured
. The
applied
input
to
the
or
example
is
increased
setting
measurement
attenuator
0
attenuators
and
to
40
dB
to
60
dB
50
,
,
conditions
signal
rst
,
the
by
dB
the
switching
referenced to
referenced
ATOR
input attenuator
switching
signal
at
mixer
10
dB
.
with
4396B
uncertainties
listed
uncertainty
is
applied
each
are
level
(the
attenuator
.
The
keeps
a
VSWR
S
input,
in
the
uncertainty
to 10
SWITCHING UNCERT
to
4396B
kept
constant
is
controlled
internal
is
4396B
the
4396B
of
respectively
caused
performance
10
dB
:
dB
:
switching
is
referenced
the
4396B
input
attenuator
using
circuit
decreased
reference
internal
1.015
by
mismatch
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
to
are
.
test
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
uncertainty
to
S
input
setting.
measure
the
stage
following
by
10
dB
level
is
set
IF
gain
connected
These
record
:
:
:
:
:
:
error
:
:
:
:
xed
:
:
:
:
:
:
the
through
the
attenuator
.
::
:
::
AINTY TEST
over
the
10
dB
attenuator
a
At
each
switching
so
the
input
,
when
the
4396B
to
the
value
constant.
to
the
signal
attenuators
When
they
are
valid.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
entire
measurement,
as
are
:
:
:
:
range
setting.
attenuator
uncertainty
to
keep
attenuator)
input
of
the
input
generator
are
used
to
used,
the
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
.
the
1.0
1.5
The
dB
dB
T
est
Equipment
Signal
Step
Attenuator
N(m)-N(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
6
Procedure
1. Record the step attenuator 50 MHz calibration values in the calculation sheet (\Calibration
2. Set
3. On the
4. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-21.
Generator
Attenuator
cable,
dB
Fixed
1:
Calibration
2:
Required when
V
alue" column).
the step attenuator to 50 dB
signal generator
Controls Settings
Frequency 50 MHz
Amplitude +12 dBm
:
:
:
:
:
1
,
10
dB
2
driver
Attenuation
:
61
cable
values for
::
cm
:
:
,
using
:
:
:
:
(two
122
(two
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
VSWR
:
:
:
:
:
:
required)
cm
required)
attenuation settings
a
programmable
, initialize the signal generator
1.02
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
of 10
dB to
step
attenuator
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8663A
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
8496A/G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
50
dB
at
50
MHz
8496G.
. Then set the controls as follows:
:
:
:
:
11500B
:
:
:
:
:
8491A
are
required.
Option
:
:
:
:
:
or
:
:
:
:
Opt
:
:
:
:
:
:
006
:
PN
001
:
:
:
:
of
8120-1840
& Opt
or
8642B
and
:
11713A
11851B
H60
H60
2-56 Performance Tests
Page 81
Note
Connect
4396B
conguration,
same
the
EXT
REF
reference
signal
Input
both
frequency
generator's
on
the
the
signal
to
10
MHz
rear
panel as
generator
obtain
a
frequency
shown in
and
the
stable
measurement.
reference output
Figure 2-21
4396B are
phase locked
to the
. With
this
to the
Figure
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5.
Press
4
Meas
set
the
6.
Press
4
Scale
4396B
7.
Press
4
Trigger
8.
Press
4
Search
on the peak of the carrier
9. Set the 4396B controls as follows
rst settings listed in T
ANALYZER
5
,
controls
Control
Center
Frequency
RBW:
1
Scale/Division:
Ref
controls to
5
,
5
,
Control Settings Key Strokes
Input Att.: 20 dB
Reference Level:030 dBm
N
as
follows:
Settings
Frequency:
Span:
kHz
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
REFERENCE VALUE
5
,
the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SINGLE
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX,4
2-21.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TYPE
5
dB/Div
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
reference
to make a sweep
Marker
able 2-16.
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SPECTRUM
,
50
MHz
10
kHz
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1MODE MENU
5
,
.
Input
N
N
N
N
N
N
setting
Attenuator
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
5
4
4
4
4
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
-
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
. This sets the input attenuator and reference level to
4
4
,
Center
5
,
4
Span
5
Bw/Avg
Scale
Ref
,
5
,
5
4
4
4
0
for
the
.W
ait for the completion of the sweep
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FIXED 1MKR
,
Scale Ref
Scale Ref
A
ccuracy
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Preset
5
5
,
,
4
4
4
1
,
5
,
5
5
5
5
,
N
RES
,
4
test.
,
,
M/
0
5
,
4
4
k/m
0
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
BW
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
x1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ATTEN,425,405,4x15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
REFERENCE VALUE,4-5,435,405,4x15
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
Scale
T
est
Setup
5
to
initialize
5
5
5
5
,
4
4
1
k/m
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
4
5
x1
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
ATTEN
5
,
Ref
to place the delta reference marker
5
N
N
N
N
N
,
the 4396B
5
,
4
4
1
0
.
5
,
5
,
4
to set
x1
.
Then
the
the
Performance Tests 2-57
Page 82
10.
Set
the
11.
P
erform
a.
Press
b.
Press
c.
Record
12.
Change
attenuator setting
T
able 2-16.
attenuator
the
following
4
T
rigger
5
4
Sea
rch
the
the
4396B input
Input
steps
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
MAX
.
,
delta
marker
in accordance
Input Attenuator
4396B Step Attenuator
Attenuator
20
30
40
50
60
to
the
rst
Reference
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
setting (40
to measure
NN
N
N
N
to
make
a
sweep
reading
attenuator
in
setting,
with T
the
able
Switching
0
0
0
+10
dB) listed
the input
.
W
ait
calculation
the
2-16
Uncertainty
Level
30
dBm
20
dBm
10
dBm
0
dBm
dBm
in the
third column
attenuator switching
for
the completion
sheet
(\4396B
reference
.
Repeat
level
step
setting,
11
T
est
40
30
20
10
0
of the
Reading"
for
each
Settings
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
of
T
able
uncertainty
sweep.
column).
and
the
setting.
.
2-16
.
13. Calculate
results
in
the test
results using
the performance
the equation
test record.
given
in
the
calculation
sheet.
Record
the
test
2-58 Performance Tests
Page 83
16. RESOLUTION
(S
A)
Description
test measures
bandwidth
The
bandwidth accuracy
tested
the
bandwidth accuracy
uncertainty
Specication
(RBW) settings
because the
is within
the 3
4396B
the
BAND
dB/60 dB
and
uses
and
specication.
bandwidth
10
kHz
selectivity
a
digital
selectivity
WIDTH A
and
and
checks
for
lter
can
the
resolution
technique
be
calculated
CCURACY/SELECTIVITY
calculates
performance
the
selectivity
bandwidth
on
RBW
settings
mathematically
meets
settings
at
resolution
the
specication.
3
kHz
3
kHz.
.
The
calculated
are
Therefore
TEST
not
,
Resolution bandwidth
A
ccuracy
@RBW
@RBW
Selectivity
@RBW
@RBW
T
est
Equipment
Signal
N(m)-N(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
Procedure
1.
Connect
Note
10
3
10
3
Generator
cable
the
test
Connect the
4396B EXT
conguration, both
same reference
kHz
kHz
(60
kHz
kHz
,
cable
(RBW)
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
dB
BW
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
61
cm
::
,
122
equipment
REF
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
/
3
dB
BW)
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
:
::
as
shown
signal
generator's
Input
the signal
frequency to
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
20%
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
10%
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
10
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8663A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
in
on
Figure
the
2-22
10
MHz
rear
panel
generator
obtain
a
.
frequency
as
shown
and
the
stable
measurement.
reference
in
Figure
4396B
are
:
:
:
or
:
:
:
:
output
2-22
phase
:
:
.
part
:
PN
to
With
locked
or
8642B
of 11851B
8120-1840
the
this
to
the
Performance Tests 2-59
Page 84
2.
Initialize
the
Figure 2-22.
signal
generator.
RBW
Accuracy
Then set
the
and
controls
Selectivity
as
follows:
T
est
Setup
3.
Press
4
the
controls
4.
|Resolution
a.
Press
b.
Set
settings
Controls
Frequency
Amplitude
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
ANALYZER
5
,
Meas
as
Control
Center
Frequency:
Reference
follows:
Settings
Level:
N
TYPE
0
Bandwidth A
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
T
able
N
2-17
the
4
Scale
4396B
listed
Ref
5
,
controls
in
SCALE/DIV
Control Settings
RBW: 10 kHz
Frequency Span: 30 kHz
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SPECTRUM
,
20
MHz
15
dBm
ccuracy T
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
as
follows
.
N
N
N
N
5
,
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
x1
.
N
N
est|
5
Settings
20
MHz
0
20
dBm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
K
ey
Strokes
5
,
to
Ref
set
4
5
the
4
Center
4
Scale
sets the
Key Strokes
4
Bw/Avg
5,4
4
Span
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
0
2
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
,
scale
RBW and
N
NNNNNNNNNNNN
RES BW
5
,
5,4
5,4
0
3
5
to
5
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
initialize
N
N
N
N
4
Preset
M/
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
appropriately
frequency span
NNNNNNN
5,4
,
4
1
5
k/m
N
0
N
N
N
5,4
the
4396B
.
Then
set
N
N
N
5
5
5
,
,
,
4
4
-
1
5
,
4
4
5
x1
.
k/m
to the
5
rst
2-60 Performance Tests
Page 85
c.
P
erform
i.
Press
ii.
Press
reference
iii.
Rotate
delta
iv
.
Press
lower
v
. Rotate
peak
vi.
Record
Result"
the
following
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
rch
the
marker
4
Ma
rk
3dB
the RPG
of
the
the
column
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
MAX
5
,
at
the
peak
RPG
knob
reads
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
1MODE
5
,
er
frequency.
knob to
signal
delta
marker
for
T
able 2-17.
steps to
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Ma
rk
of
to
0
3
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MENU
until
the
RB
10
30
100
300
1
3
measure the
to
make
N
N
NN
NN
NN
1MODE MENU
5
,
er
the
carrier
move
dB
6
0.1
N
N
N
N
N
N
resolution
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
FIXED
,
move
the
delta
frequency
RBW
W
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
a
sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
.
the
delta
dB
.
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1MKR
the
delta
marker
reading
bandwidth
A
ccuracy
4396B
Frequency
RBW accuracy:
.
W
ait
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
FIXED 1MKR
,
marker
N
N
N
N
NN
to
place
marker
reads
in
accuracy).
T
est
Span
30
kHz
90
kHz
300
kHz
900
kHz
3
MHz
9
MHz
for the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
lower
the
to
higher
0
dB
the
performance
Settings
completion of
N
N
NN
NN
N
to place
frequency
delta
marker
frequency
6
0.1
dB
.
the sweep
the delta
points
reference
points
test
record
.
marker
until
at the
beyond
(\T
est
the
the
d.
Change
repeat
5.
|Resolution
a.
Copy
column
b.
Set
c.
Set
to
the
the
4396B
4-c
Bandwidth
the
test
for
the
the
4396B
Control
Scale/Division:
VBW:
the
4396B
rst
settings
Control Settings Key Strokes
RBW: 10 kHz
Frequency Span: 200 kHz
Input Att.: 10 dB
for
results
RBW
controls
Settings
10
kHz
controls
RBW
and
each
setting.
Selectivity
of
the
selectivity).
as
follows
10
dB/Div
as
follows
listed
in
frequency
T
RBW
accuracy
.
. This
T
able
2-18
span
est|
K
ey
4
Scale
4
Bw/Avg
sets the
.
4
Bw/Avg
4
Span
4
Scale Ref
settings
to
the
Strokes
5
,
Ref
5
,
5
,
5,4
5,4
2
5
,
in
calculation
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VIDEO BW
RBW,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RES BW
5,4
0
0
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNN
ATTEN,415,405,4x15
accordance
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
1
span, and
NNN
5,4
,
4
1
5
5,4
k/m
with
sheet
(\3dB
5
5
5
,
,
4
4
4
,
0
1
4
5,4
x1
0
5
,
5
4
0
k/m
input attenuator
5
k/m
T
able
2-17
Bandwidth"
settings
,
and
Performance Tests 2-61
Page 86
d.
P
erform
i.
Press
ii.
Press
reference
iii.
Rotate
delta
iv
.
Press
lower
v
. Rotate
peak
vi.
Record
column
the
following
5
4
4
marker
4
60 dB
frequency
T
rigger
5
,
Sea
rch
at
the
RPG
5
Ma
rk
er
the RPG
the
delta
for
the
,
the
,
frequency.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
MAX
peak
knob
reads
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
1MODE
knob to
until
marker
RBW
T
able 2-18.
RB
W
10
kHz
30
kHz
100
kHz
300
kHz
1
MHz
3
MHz
steps to
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
to
,
4
Ma
rk
er
of
the
to
move
between
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MENU
move
the
selectivity).
RBW
Frequency
measure the
make
a
sweep
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1MODE MENU
5
,
carrier
the
0
60
dB
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
FIXED
,
N
the
marker
N
N
NN
delta
frequency
Selectivity
4396B
200
600
2
6
20
30
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
.
delta
and
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1MKR
delta
reads
in
the
T
est
Span
.
NN
N
Input
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
RBW selectivity
W
ait
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
FIXED 1MKR
,
marker
0
60.8
N
NN
to
place
marker
between
calculation
for the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
lower
dB
.
the
to
higher
Attenuator
N
N
N
Settings
10
dB
10
dB
10
dB
10
dB
0
dB
0
dB
.
completion of
NN
NN
N
to place
frequency
delta
marker
frequency
0
dB
and
0
sheet
(\60
the sweep
the delta
points
reference
points
0.8
dB
dB
Bandwidth"
marker
until
.
.
the
at the
beyond
the
e.
Change
T
able
f.
Calculate
calculation
the
2-18
RBW
.
Repeat
the
sheet.
test
,
the
results
Record
frequency
5-d
for
for
the
the
test
span,
each
RBW
results
and
the
setting.
selectivity
in
input
using
the
performance
attenuator
the
equation
test
in
accordance
given
record.
in
with
the
2-62 Performance Tests
Page 87
17. RESOLUTION
TEST
(SA)
Description
test measures
switching
RBW
The
is
because the
the
the resolution
from 3
uncertainty of
uncertainty can
kHz
4396B
the 4396B
to
each
switching
uses
be
calculated
bandwidth
specication.
Specication
RB
W
switching uncertainty
@SP
AN
<
100
2
RBW
T
est
Equipment
BAND
WIDTH SWITCHING
spectrum amplitude
(RBW)
RBW
10
kHz.
the
RBW
between
a
digital
lter
mathematically
for
RBW
10
setting.
technique
kHz,
23
measurement
The
any
two
on
RBW
.
The
C,
5
referenced
6
uncertainty
RBWs
settings
calculated
UNCERTAINTY
uncertainty
is
3
kHz
uncertainty
to
10
tested
is
not
3
kHz.
kHz
caused
for
tested.
Therefore
is
RBW
switching
within
:
::
:
by
:
This
,
the
:
<
the
6
0.5
dB
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
N(m)-BNC(f)
Procedure
1.
Connect the
cable
adapter
test
equipment
,
61
cm
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PN
8120-1839
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
PN
1250-1476
as
shown
in
Figure
2-23
.
Figure 2-23. RBW Switching Uncertainty Test Setup
Performance Tests 2-63
Page 88
2.
Press
the
4
Meas
controls
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
ANALYZER
5
,
as
follows:
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
TYPE
N
N
SPECTRUM
,
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
NN
,
4
Preset
5
to initialize
the 4396B
. Then
set
3.
Set
RBW
4.
Press
5.
Press
at
6.
Set
settings
Control
Center
Reference
Scale/Division:
the
4396B
switching
Control
RBW:
Frequency
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
rch
the
peak
the
4396B
listed in
Control
RBW:
Frequency
Settings
Frequency:
Level:
controls
uncertainty
Settings
10
kHz
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
of
the
controls
T
able
Settings
3
kHz
1 dB/Div
Span:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Ma
rker
carrier
2-19
Span:
T
able
20
0
18 dBm
as
follows
test.
100
kHz
to make
N
N
N
N
1MODE
5
,
.
as
follows
.
30
kHz
2-19.
MHz
.
a sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
.
RB
K
4
Center
4
Scale
4
Scale
K
4
Bw/Avg
4
Span
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
MENU
K
4
Bw/Avg
4
Span
W
Switching
ey
sets
ey
.W
N
N
N
N
,
sets
ey
Strokes
5
5
,
,
4
2
N
REFERENCE
5
,
Ref
N
SCALE/DIV
5
,
Ref
the
4396B
Strokes
N
N
N
N
RES
5
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
1
ait
for
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
FIXED
the
RBW
Strokes
N
NN
N
RES
5
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
3
Uncertainty
4
0
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
0
the
N
N
N
N
NN
1MKR
N
N
N
N
N
5
0
5
,
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
,
4
5
4
M/
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
,
RBW to
NN
NN
NN
N
5
BW
0
N
N
BW
k/m
,
,
4
1
5
5
,
4
k/m
completion
N
N
N
N
N
to
place
and
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
3
5
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
4
4
,
4
-
5
5
4
,
4
1
x1
the reference
5
5
,
4
k/m
0
of
the
the
delta
frequency
5
k/m
T
est
Settings
5
,
5
4
,
4
1
sweep
marker
span
5
,
4
8
x1
10 kHz
.
to
the
5
of the
reference
rst
4396B
RB
3
30
100
300
1
3
7.
Perform
a.
b.
c.
8. Change the 4396B RBW and frequency span in accordance with
for each setting.
the following
5
Press
4
Press
4
Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record (\T
Trigger
Search
,
5
,
steps to
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
NNNNNN
MAX
N
NNNNN
to move the delta marker to the peak of the carrier
measure the
N
to make a sweep
W
kHz
kHz
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
Frequency
RBW switching
.W
ait for the completion of the sweep
30
300
1
3
10
30
Span
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
uncertainty:
.
.
est Result" column).
Table 2-19. Repeat step 7
2-64 Performance Tests
Page 89
18. IF
Description
The
has
determined
changing
the
In
this
a
1
dB
4396B
measurement, the
measure the
T
o
do
using
circuit
decreased
decreased
dB
.
Two
output
reduce
measurement
GAIN SWITCHING
IF
gain is
twelve
test
IF
gain setting
test, a
step
reference
this
the
following
6
dB
connector
the
the total
IF
gain
by
the
measures
the
IF gain
50 MHz
and a
switching uncertainty
,
the
input
attenuators
by
2
dB
by
2
dB
xed
attenuators
measurement
uncertainties
gain of
settings
selected
the
4396B
settings over
at a
reference level
CW signal
10 dB
level
settings
internal measurement
attenuator setting
the
IF
signal
(while
through
and
the
the internal
from
0dB
reference
spectrum
the entire
is applied
step attenuator
(where the
exclusively.
so
as
to
keep
path)
the
IF
gain
the
two
with
a
VSWR
4396B
uncertainties
listed
S
input, respectively
in
UNCERTAINTY
path of
to 40
dB.
level
and input
amplitude measurement
of
0
10
to
.
The
IF gain
settings (other
is
xed
the signal
constant.
setting
step
the
is
attenuators
of
caused
performance
the IF
The IF
attenuator settings
range.
the
The
dBm
and
4396B
signal
amplitude
is varied
to
10
dB
level
F
or
example
increased by
whose
1.015
are
.
by
mismatch error
test
TEST (S
signal within
gain
is
automatically
uncertainty caused
switching
an
input
S
input
through
is
measured
over
the
than
the
.
The
applied
input
to
the
, when
2 dB),
total attenuation
connected to
These
xed
.
record are
A)
the
4396B
.
uncertainty
attenuator
two
at
entire
IF
gain)
the reference
the measured
attenuators
When
are
signal
A/D
converter
the signal
they
valid.
range).
level
.
The
set
to
the
by
is
referenced
setting
step
is increased
attenuators:
several
At
kept
constant
is
level is
signal level
generator
are
used
are
used,
of
controlled
(internal
4396B
setting
10
dB
each
by 2
to
the
to
.
to
is
Specication
IF
gain
switching
@
input
att.
xed,
Test
Equipment
Signal
Step
Step
Attenuator
6
N(m)-N(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m) cable
Generator
Attenuator
Attenuator
driver
dB Fixed Attenuation
cable, 61 cm (three required)
1: Calibration values for attenuation settings of 10 dB to 50 dB at
2: Calibration values for attenuation settings of 2
required.
3: Required when using a programmable step attenuator of the 8494G and the 8496G.
uncertainty
referenced
:
::
::
,
10
,
1dB
3
::
dB
:
::
:
,122cm
1
2
to
0
20
dBm
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
step,
VSWR
step,
VSWR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:::::: ::::::: :::::: :::
1.02
1.02
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:::::: ::::::: ::::::
::::::
::::::: ::::::: :::::: :::::
[
ref.
level
0
input
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:::::: ::::::: ::::::: ::::
::::::::::
dB,4dB
,6dB
,8dB
att
]
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
8663A
:
:
:
:
8496A/G
::
::
:
8494A/G
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:::::::::::::::::::::
50 MHz are required.
, and 10 dB at 50 MHz are
Option 001
Option 001
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8491A
11500B or part of 11851B
Opt 006 & Opt H60
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
6
0.3
or
8642B
and H60
and H60
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
11713A
PN 8120-1840
dB
Performance Tests 2-65
Page 90
Procedure
1.
Record the
attenuator
2.
Set the
3.
Initialize the
50 MHz
in the
1dB
step attenuator
signal generator
calibration values
calculation sheet
to 10
. Then
of the
1dB
(\Calibration V
dB.
Set the
set the
10 dB
controls
step attenuator
alue" column).
step
attenuator
as
follows:
and the
to
10
10
dB
dB
.
4.
Connect the
Note
Controls
Frequency
Amplitude
test equipment
Connect
4396B
conguration,
same
the
signal
EXT
REF
reference
as
shown
generator's
Input
both
the
frequency
Settings
50 MHz
+6 dBm
in
on
the
signal
Figure
10
rear
generator
to
obtain
2-24
MHz
panel
a
.
frequency
as
shown
and
the
stable
measurement.
reference
in
Figure
4396B
are
output
2-24.
phase
to
the
With this
locked
to
the
2-66 Performance Tests
Figure 2-24. IF Gain Switching Uncertainty T
est Setup
Page 91
5.
Press
set
4
the
5
,
Meas
controls
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
as
follows:
N
ANALYZER
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
TYPE
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
SPECTRUM
,
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
NN
,
4
Preset
5
to initialize
the 4396B
. Then
6.
7.
8.
Press
Press
at
the
Press
setting
Control
Center
Frequency
RBW:
Reference
Scale/Division:
Input
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
rch
peak
4
Scale
listed
Settings
Frequency:
300
Att.:
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
of the
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
5
,
Ref
in
the
T
Hz
N
N
able
Span:
Level:
N
N
,
N
N
3
0
5
dB/Div
MANU
N
carrier.
N
Reference
N
N
N
N
4
Ma
N
N
N
rst
N
N
N
N
N
N
AL,
N
to make
5
rker
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
column
2-20.
4396B
50
kHz
10
N
N
1MODE
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
MHz
dBm
10 dB
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
IF
Level
0
0
0
0
0
12
0
14
0
16
0
18
0
20
0
30
0
40
N
N
0
2
4
6
8
a sweep
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
MENU
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
4
0
of
T
able
Gain
Switching
Step
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
K
ey
Strokes
5
4
Center
5
,
4
Span
4
Bw/Avg
4
Scale
Ref
4
Scale
Ref
4
Scale
Ref
changes
.W
ait
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
FIXED
,
5
to
,
4
x1
2-20
1
Attenuator
5
5
,
,
4
4
0
5
5
,
4
4
k/m
3
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
RES
5
,
N
NN
NN
NN
N
REFERENCE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SCALE/DIV
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ATTEN
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
ATTEN
to
for
the
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
1MKR
set
the
.
Uncertainty
dB
0
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
10
10
10
5
,
4
M/
5
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
BW
,
4
3
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AUTO
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
auto
completion
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
to
4396B
Step
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
5
5
,
4
,
4
0
0
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
N
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
man
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
MAN
place
the
reference
T
est
10
Attenuator
5
,
4
x1
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
-
5
4
x1
N
N
(Then
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
),
of
the
delta
Settings
dB
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
20
30
40
5
5
5
,
4
1
the
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
ATTEN
sweep
marker
level
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
5
,
4
0
softkey
N
N
N
N
,
to
4
,
.
1
4
x1
5
,
the
4
5
label
5
5
,
4
x1
0
reference
rst
9. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to the rst setting 0 dB listed in
Table 2-20.
10. Set the 10 dB step attenuator to the rst setting 10 dB listed in the third
T
able 2-20.
11. P
erform the following steps to measure the IF gain switching uncertainty
a.
Press
4
Trigger
b.
Press
4
Search
c. Record the delta marker reading in the calculation sheet (\4396B Reading" column).
12. Change the 4396B reference level, the 1 dB step attenuator, and the 10 dB step attenuator
settings in accordance with Table 2-20. Repeat step 11 for each setting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SINGLE
5
,
NNNNNNNNNNN
5
,
MAX
to make a sweep
to move the marker to the peak of the carrier.
.W
ait for the completion of the sweep
the second column of
column of
.
.
Performance Tests 2-67
Page 92
13. Calculate
results in
the test
the performance
results using
the equation
test record.
given in
the
calculation
sheet.
Record
the
test
2-68 Performance Tests
Page 93
19. NOISE
Description
test
applies 39
S
input.
each
marker
In
CW
determined
39
high.
frequency signal.
Specication
Then
carrier
mode
this
test, the
frequency
MHz
is
Therefore
this
using
,
the
signal. The
by
one
of the
the phase
SIDEBANDS
MHz, 10
measures
a
4396B
noise
noise sidebands
frequencies where
the
noise
MHz, 100
noise
NOISE
sidebands
noise sidebands
noise caused
sidebands at
TEST (S
MHz, and
sidebands at
FORM function.
level is
at the
displayed directly
1kHz
around the
by the
the phase
the oset
A)
1.8 GHz
osets
Using the
oset
from
fraction N
noise
1kHz
CW frequency
6
1kHz,
the
1 kHz
oscillator
of
is
6
noise form
in [dBc/Hz].
carrier
oset
the
1
measured
10
.
The
kHz
from
signals to
kHz,
and
function and
is
measured
the
frequency
oset
only
at
6
1
carrier
is
most
the
MHz
at
39
the
the
a
39
are
range
likely
MHz
4396B
from
delta
MHz
mainly
around
to
CW
be
Noise
T
est
Signal
N(m)-N(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
Procedure
1.
2.
Note
sidebands
1
Equipment
Generator
Initialize
Connect
dBc/Hz
dBc/Hz
>
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11500B
:
:
:
:
:
Figure
:
:
:
:
1
1
:
:
GHz.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
or part
:
::
::
output
2-25
Oset
from
Carrier
1
kHz
10
kHz
1
MHz
:
Center
frequency
:
:
cable,
the
the
61 cm
cable,
signal
test
equipment
Connect
4396B
conguration, both the signal generator and the 4396B are phase locked
same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
122 cm
generator
the signal
EXT
REF
1
GHz.
A
dd
[20log(
frequency(GHz)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
.
Then
set
the
amplitude
as
shown
generator's
Input
on
in
Figure
the
rear panel
10
2-25
MHz
Noise
)]
for
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
to
0
.
frequency
as
shown
Sidebands
<
0
95
<
0
105
<
0
110
frequency
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
dBm.
reference
dBc/Hz
:
:
in
8663A
:
:
PN
to
.
With
or
8642B
of
11851B
8120-1840
the
this
to the
Performance Tests 2-69
Page 94
Figure 2-25.
Noise Sidebands
Test
Setup
3.
Press
set
4.
On
T
able
Signal
Carrier
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ON
,
T
able
N
TYPE
set
ANALYZER
5
4
,
Meas
the controls
Control
Reference
Noise
the
signal
2-21
Generator
Frequency
39
10
100 MHz 100 MHz 1 kHz 10 Hz 25 kHz
1 GHz 1GHz 1 kHz 10 Hz 25 kHz
1.8 GHz 1.8 GHz 1 kHz 10 Hz 25 kHz
F
generator
.
MHz
MHz
as follows:
Settings
Level:
orm:
Center Frequency RBW VBW Frequency Span
N
N
N
N
N
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
dBm
the
2-21.
39
10
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
SPECTRUM
frequency
MHz
MHz
N
K
4
4
changes
Noise
100
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
ey
Strokes
Scale
Ref
N
5
,
Utilit
y
to
the
Sideband
4396B Oset
Hz
10
kHz
N
,
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
to
3
N
N
N
N
NOISE
rst
Hz
Hz
N
N
T
N
N
N
est
NOISE
4
Preset
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
FORM
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
carrier
Settings
5
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
on
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
FORM
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
to
N
N
VALUE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
frequency
2.5 MHz
2.5
2.5
2.5 MHz
initialize
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
OFF
N
N
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ON
off
2.5
kHz
25
kHz
MHz
MHz
5
,
4
0
(Then
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
.)
the
4
x1
39
4396B
5
the
MHz
.
softkey
in
from
6
6
6
6
Then
label
Carrier
6
1 kHz
10
kHz
6
1MHz
10 kHz
6
1MHz
10 kHz
6
1MHz
10 kHz
6
1
MHz
2-70 Performance Tests
Page 95
5.
On the
4396B,
set the
controls as
follows (the
rst setting
in
T
able
2-21
).
6.
7.
8.
P
erform
39
MHz
a.
Press
b.
Press
the
c.
Press
d.
Record
e.
Press
f.
Record
On
the
T
able
On the
Control
Center
RBW:
VBW:
Frequency
the
following
carrier
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
rch
peak
of
5
,
4
4
1
-
the
5
,
4
4
1
the
signal
2-21
.
4396B,
Control
Center
RBW:
VBW:
Settings K
Frequency: 39
100 Hz
3
Hz
Span:
steps
.
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
MAX
5
5
,
marker
k/m
delta
generator
Frequency: 10
1kHz
10
,
,
the
4
set
Settings K
k/m
5
Hz
to
the
4
Ma
carrier
5
to
reading
move
marker
,
controls
2.5
N
N
N
N
to
rk
.
move
the
set
MHz
kHz
to
measure
make
N
N
NN
NN
1MODE MENU
5
,
er
the
in
delta
reading
the
frequency
as
MHz
ey Strokes
4
Center
4
Bw/Avg
4
Bw/Avg
4
Span
a
sweep.
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
delta
marker
the
performance
marker
in
the
follows
ey
4
Center
4
Bw/Avg
4
Bw/Avg
5
5
,
5
,
the noise
Wait
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
,
to an
performance test
to
(the
Strokes
5
,
5
4
,
4
,
3
9
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
RES
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
VIDEO
5
,
5
5
,
,
4
4
4
2
N
N
1MKR
the
5
,
5
,
5
.
sideband level
for the
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
to
to
an
test
oset of
second
second
5
5
4
,
4
,
1
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
RES
N
N
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VIDEO
N
BW
N
BW
N
5
4
M/
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
4
1
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
5
BW
,
4
3
5
5
,
4
k/m
completion of
place the
oset
of
record.
+1 kHz
record.
center
setting
5
4
M/
N
N
NN
NN
5
,
4
,
4
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
BW
,
4
1
5
5
,
4
,
0
,
listed
k/m
,
4
0
x1
5
4
x1
at
6
1kHz
delta marker
0
1
kHz from
from the
frequency
in
5
5
5
,
4
4
0
x1
5
T
able
the
oset
sweep
10 MHz
from
.
reference at
the carrier
carrier
2-21
):
the
.
.
in
9.
P
erform
osets
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k. Press
l. Record the marker reading in the performance test record.
m. Press
n. Record the delta marker reading in the performance test record.
10. On the signal generator, set the frequency to the next center frequency 100 MHz in
Table 2-21.
11. On the 4396B, press
the
following
from
the
4
Span
4
T
rigger
4
Sea
5
4
,
-
the
5
,
4
1
4
Span
4
Trigger
4
Search
5,4
4
-
5,4
4
1
rch
4
4
1
1
5
,
5
5
0
5
,
5,4
M/
5
5
4
5
,
the carrier
,
marker
,
delta marker
4
5
,
Press
Press
Press
the
peak of
Press
Record
Press
Record the
Press
Press
Press
the peak of the carrier
steps
carrier
5
2
,
N
4
0
4
k/m
5
2
,
NNNNNNNN
M/
5
of
5
,
,
4
4
5
N
N
MAX
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MAX
k/m
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
N
5
SINGLE
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
4
Ma
5
,
4
k/m
reading
5
to
5
5
,
,
4
4
5
.
NNNNNN
NNN
,
4
Marker
5
to move the delta marker at the oset
to move the delta marker at the oset +1 MHz
4
Center
to
measure
10
MHz.
5
to
set
make
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1MODE
5
,
the delta
in
the
the
reading
5
to
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5
1MODE
,
the
a
sweep
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
performance
delta
in
set
N
N
to
rk
er
.
to move
move
,
4
M/
to make a sweep
.
5,415,405,405,4
the
noise
sideband
frequency
.
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MENU
marker
the
performance
the frequency
.W
MENU
M/
span to
W
ait
for
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
,
marker at
,
5
NN
1MKR
at
ait for the completion of the sweep
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNN
1MKR
to set the center frequency to 100 MHz.
level
at
6
10
kHz
and
6
25 kHz.
the
completion
to
place
the
the
oset
test
record.
the
oset
+10
test
record.
span
to
2.5
to place the delta marker reference at
0
of
the
sweep
delta
marker
0
10
kHz
kHz
from
MHz.
1 MHz from the carrier
from the carrier
from
the
reference
the
carrier
1
MHz
.
carrier
.
.
at
.
.
.
12. Repeat step 9 to measure the noise sideband level at610 kHz and61 MHz osets from the
carrier of 100 MHz.
Performance Tests 2-71
Page 96
13.
On the
T
able 2-21
signal generator
.
,set
the frequency
to the
next center
frequency
1
GHz
in
14.
On the
15.
Repeat step
carrier
16.
On the
T
able 2-21
17.
On the
18.
Repeat step
carrier
4396B,
of 1
press
9to
measure the
GHz.
4
Center
signal generator
.
4396B
,
press
4
Center
9
to
measure
of 1.8
GHz.
5
,set
5
the
5
,
4
1
5
,
4
to set
G/n
noise sideband
the
frequency
5
5
,
4
.
5
,
4
8
sideband
,
4
1
noise
,
4
G/n
the center
level
to
the
next
5
to set
level
frequency to
at
6
10
center
the
center
at
6
10
kHz
and
frequency
frequency
kHz
and
1GHz.
6
1
MHz
6
1
MHz
1.8
to
osets
GHz
1.8
GHz.
osets
in
from
from
the
the
2-72 Performance Tests
Page 97
20. FREQUENCY
Description
test
measures the
over
the
entire
deviation
At
frequency
meter
measurement
with
performed
done
from
through
the
reading of
to
remove
twice
frequency
the
ranges
apower
using
the
amplitude measurement
absolute
100
a power
the power
while
reversing
frequency tracking
RESPONSE TEST
range
.
The frequency
amplitude
kHz,
splitter.
meter and
The signal
meter to
accuracy
this test
connections of
applies a
level is
a power
obtain the
between two
(SA)
accuracy of
response is
at a
frequency of
CW signal
measured
sensor.
the power
Then
absolute
output ports
the 4396B
calculated as
to the
by
doing
the
amplitude
splitter's two
spectrum measurement
20 MHz.
4396B
a
4396B
accuracy
of
the
the accuracy
S
input
4396B
reading
output
power
spectrum
is
.
These
ports
splitter
and
power
compared
tests
.
This
.
are
is
At low
generator using
used
Specication
T
frequencies (
as
the measurement
Frequency
@23
10
2
est
Equipment
P
ower
P
ower
Signal
Function
Two-way
N(m)-N(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
BNC(m)-BNC(m)
N(m)-N(m)
N(m)-BNC(f)
response
C,
6
5
MHz
Hz
frequency
Meter
Sensor
Generator
Genarator
P
ower
cable,
adapter
<
the 4396B
att.=
10
frequency
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
Splitter
61
cable,
cable,
:
adapter
100
kHz),
this
test
spectrum measurement.
standard.
dB
,
:
::
:
cm
:
<
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
61
122
:
:
:
:
referenced
1.8
10
MHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
cm
cm
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
GHz
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
::
to
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
measures
level
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
the
CW
signal
level
of
the
function
The
function
at
20
MHz
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
generator's
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
436A
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
::
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
Opt.
:
:
:
:
:
::
::
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
11500B
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
:
output
::
:
:
:
022
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
::
:
::
:
:
:
:
:
:
level
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
<
,
437B
,
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8663A
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
or
part
of
:
:
:
:
PN
8120-1839
:
:
:
:
PN
8120-1840
:
:
::
PN 1250-1475
:
:
:
:
PN 1250-1476
is
6
0.5
6
1.5
or
438A
:
:
:
8482A
or
8642B
:
:
3325A
:
11667A
11851B
dB
dB
Procedure
1. Connect the power sensor to the power meter
sensor.
2. Connect the
Note
test equipment as shown in Figure 2-26.
Connect the signal generator's 10 MHz frequency
4396B EXT REF Input on the rear
conguration, both the signal generator and the 4396B are phase locked to the
same reference frequency to obtain a stable measurement.
. Calibrate the power meter for the power
reference output to the
panel as shown in Figure 2-26. With this
Performance Tests 2-73
Page 98
3.
Initialize
4.
Press
set
the
the
5
4
Meas
controls
signal
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
ANALYZER
,
as
Figure
generator
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
follows:
2-26. Frequency
.
Then set
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SPECTRUM
,
NN
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
TYPE
N
Response
the
amplitude
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ANALYZER
T
est
Setup
to
0
4
dBm.
N
N
N
,
4
Preset
5
to
1
initialize
the
4396B.
Then
Control
Frequency
RBW:
Reference
Settings
Span:
100 Hz
Level:
Scale/Division:
Input Att.: 10 dB
5. On the signal generator
of T
able 2-22. T
able 2-22 lists the test settings at frequencies
2-74 Performance Tests
K
ey
Strokes
5
5
1
0
1
dB/Div
kHz
8
dBm
4
Span
4
Bw/Avg
4
Scale Ref
4
Scale
4
Scale Ref
,
Ref
4
1
5
5
,
4
k/m
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
RES
,
5
5
BW
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
REFERENCE
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
SCALE/DIV
,
NNNNNNNNNNNNN
ATTEN,4
5
,
NN
NN
N
N
5
5
,
,
4
,
4
0
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
VALUE
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
N
N
N
N
5
,
,
4
1
5
5
,
4
4
x1
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
5
5
,
,
5
4
x1
,
4
4
-
4
8
NNNN
5
5,4
1
5,4
x1
0
, set the frequency to the rst frequency 20 MHz in the
100 kHz.
5
x1
rst column
Page 99
T
able 2-22.
Frequency Response
T
est
Settings
1
6.
7.
On
the
MHz
P
erform
a.
Press
b.
Press
c.
Record
1"
reference
in
and
4396B
T
able
the
4
Trigger
4
Sea
the
\P
,
press
2-22
.
following
N
N
N
N
N
N
SINGLE
5
,
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
MAX
5
,
rch
4396B
ower
Meter
.
4
Center
steps
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
NN
to
marker
Signal Generator
Frequency
5
5
N
N
NN
N
place
5
to
,
,
4
4
2
to
measure
make
the
,
0
a
marker
reading
Reading
1"
4396B
Center Frequency
20
MHz
20
MHz
100 kHz 100 kHz
1
MHz
1
MHz
6MHz 6MHz
10
MHz
10
MHz
50 MHz 50 MHz
100
MHz
1
GHz
1.79
GHz
1.8
GHz
5
to
4
M/
the
sweep
and
columns
set
the
frequency
.
W
ait
at
the
power
of
the
for
peak of
meter
100
MHz
1
1.79
1.8
center
frequency
response
the
completion
the carrier
reading
calculation
GHz
GHz
GHz
.
in
the
sheet
to
of
.
\4396B
for
the
the
sweep.
the
rst
setting
Reading
20 MHz
20
8.
Change
T
power
the
9.
Reverse
able
2-22
meter
calculation
the
the
signal
.
Then
power
generator
repeat
reading
sheet
step
in
the
for
splitter
frequency
7
for each
\
4396B
frequencies
output
connections
and
setting.
Reading
100
the 4396B
Record
1" and
\P
kHz.
as
shown in
center
the
ower
frequency
4396B
Meter
marker
Reading
Figure 2-27
in
accordance
reading
1"
.
and
columns
with
of
Performance Tests 2-75
Page 100
10.
Repeat
4396B marker
Meter Reading
steps
5
through
reading
2"
Figure
8
and
columns
2-27. Frequency
to remove
power
of
the
the
meter
calculation
power
reading
sheet.
Response
splitter
in
tracking
the
in
T
est
\
4396B
Setup
2
characteristic
Reading
2"
.
Record
and
\P
the
ower
11. Change
the test
2-76 Performance Tests
equipment
setup
as
shown
in
Figure
2-28
.
Loading...